JP2016182295A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing the lowering of game amusement by preventing occurrence of drawback to players in a specific game state.SOLUTION: In a jackpot game state, a first big winning port shutter A361A and a first big winning port shutter B361B can be controlled to be at a first position and then a second big winning port shutter 371A can be controlled to be at the first position and a first big winning port shutter A and a first big winning port shutter B can be controlled to be at the first position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

The game machine determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player by winning a game ball (an example of a game medium) in a predetermined area provided on the game board. If the result is affirmative, there is something that shifts to a specific gaming state.
In this specific gaming state, the variable winning device provided on the game board is executed a plurality of times when the round game that is closed after the predetermined number of times is opened, and the variable winning device that has been opened is A predetermined number of game balls are paid out by winning the game balls.
In such a gaming machine, the first and second variable winning devices are provided, the second variable winning device is provided with a V zone (an example of a specific area), and a game ball wins in the V zone in a specific gaming state, A probability-changing gaming state with a relatively high probability of being determined to shift to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, that is, a probability-changing game having a higher probability of determining to shift to the specific gaming state than the non-probability changing gaming state A gaming machine that shifts to a state has been proposed (see Patent Document 1).
In the above gaming machine, the upper and lower variable prize-winning devices may be alternately opened during the specific gaming state, and the game ball that has flowed down when the upper variable prize-winning device is closed is opened in the lower variable state. By winning the winning device, the game ball is designed not to win after the upper variable winning device is closed.

JP 2014-57892 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, the game ball that has flowed down when the lower variable winning device is closed will enter the outlet, so that neither the upper variable winning device nor the lower variable winning device wins. The situation where a game ball exists arises, and invites the fall of interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in interest by preventing a situation in which a player is disadvantaged in a specific gaming state. The purpose is to provide.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention includes:
A game board having a game area;
A launching means capable of launching a game medium in a game area;
A first passing area through which a game medium rolling in the gaming area can pass;
A first displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the first passage area and a second position that is difficult;
A game medium that rolls through the game area can pass therethrough, and a second passage area provided at a predetermined interval with respect to the first passage area;
A second displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the second passage area and a second position that is difficult;
A game medium that rolls through the game area can pass through, and a third passage area provided between the first passage area and the second passage area,
A third displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the third passage area and a second position that is difficult;
Specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Game state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state on condition that a positive determination is made by the specific gaming state transition determination means;
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing a first advantageous game for controlling the first displacement member and the second displacement member to a first position a predetermined number of times in a specific gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means;
Second advantageous game execution means capable of executing a second advantageous game for controlling the third displacement member to the first position a predetermined number of times in a specific gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means;
With
The specific game state controlled by the game state control means includes a specific game state in which the second advantageous game is executed after the first advantageous game is executed, and then the first advantageous game can be executed.
When the game medium is launched in a predetermined direction by the launching means, the game medium can pass over the third passage area after passing over the first passage area, and then pass over the second passage area.

  According to this configuration, in the specific gaming state, after the first displacement member and the second displacement member are controlled to the first position, the third displacement member is controlled to the first position, and then the first displacement member and the second displacement member are controlled. It is possible to control the displacement member to the first position. The game medium can pass over the third passage area after passing over the first passage area, and then pass over the second passage area. According to such a configuration, the game medium that has not passed through the first passage area when the first displacement member is in the first position can be prevented from being taken out by the third passage area. The game medium that has not passed through the third passage area when the three displacement members are in the first position can be prevented from being missed by the second passage area. In this way, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player that is missed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention further includes a specific area through which a game medium that has passed through the first passage area and / or a game medium that has passed through the second passage area can pass,
A variable member capable of changing between an easy passage state in which a game medium can easily pass through a specific area and a difficult passage state in which passage is difficult;
Specified after the end of the specific gaming state based on the passage of the game medium in the specific area during the first advantageous game being executed by the first advantageous game executing means in the specific gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means Special gaming state control means that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is easily determined to shift to the specific gaming state by the gaming state transition determination means;
With
In the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means,
When the total time for the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be displaced to the first position is defined as the first time, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced to the first position, , The passage difficulty advantageous game that is defined so that the variable member is in a state where the passage is easy for the second time in total,
The time when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced to the first position is defined as a third time that is equal to or less than the first time, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the first position. An easy-to-pass advantageous game that is defined such that when the variable member is displaced, the variable member is in an easy-to-pass state for a fourth time longer than the second time in total.
In the specific gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means,
A first specific game state in which the first advantageous game execution means executes only the easy-to-pass advantageous game only a predetermined number of times, and the second advantageous game execution means executes the second advantageous game a predetermined number of times;
A second specific game state in which the first advantageous game executing means executes only the difficult-to-pass advantageous games only a predetermined number of times and the second advantageous game executing means executes the second advantageous games a predetermined number of times. .

  In this configuration, a first specific gaming state in which it is difficult to pass the game medium to the specific area and a second specific gaming state in which the game medium can easily pass to the specific area are provided, and the first specific gaming state passes in the first specific gaming state. The time that can pass through the area is the first time, and the time that can pass through the passing area in the second specific gaming state is the third time that is equal to or less than the first time. As described above, in the first specific game state where it is difficult to pass the game medium to the specific area, the time during which the game medium can pass through the pass area is not shortened compared to the second specific game state where the game medium can easily pass through the specific area. And providing the point which does not become disadvantageous in the 1st specific game state rather than the 2nd specific game state can aim at the improvement of a further interest.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention further includes a fourth passage area through which a game medium rolling in the gaming area can pass,
A fourth displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the fourth passage area and a second position that is difficult;
A fifth passage area through which game media rolling in the game area can pass;
A fifth displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the fifth passage area and a second position that is difficult;
With
The first passage region or the second passage region is arranged between the third passage region and the fourth passage region,
The fourth passage area is
When the first passage region is disposed between the third passage region and the fourth passage region, the first passage region is disposed between the first passage region and the fifth passage region,
When the second passage region is disposed between the third passage region and the fourth passage region, the second passage region is disposed between the second passage region and the fifth passage region,
The first advantageous game execution means can control the first displacement member, the second displacement member, and the fifth displacement member to the first position a predetermined number of times as the first advantageous game,
The second advantageous game execution means can control the third displacement member and the fourth displacement member to the first position a predetermined number of times as the second advantageous game.

  According to this configuration, in the specific gaming state, the first displacement member, the second displacement member, and the fifth displacement member are set to the first position, and the third displacement member and the fourth displacement member are set to the first position. Control can be alternated. In this way, in the specific gaming state, when the mutual displacement members are in the first position, the game medium that has not passed through the passing area is not dropped, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player of missing. Since the situation can be further reduced, the interest can be further improved.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce a situation in which a player is disadvantaged in a specific gaming state, and thus it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a gaming board in a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation | movement pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening-and-closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 4 is a timing chart showing operation timings in a hit pattern 1 and a hit pattern 4 of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a timing chart showing operation timings in a hit pattern 2 and a hit pattern 3 of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a timing chart showing operation timings in a hit pattern 7 and a hit pattern 8 of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram showing the gaming state and effect mode of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning notification process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st production mode change process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd production mode change process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | emission error alerting | reporting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening-and-closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member action | operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for game state determination of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram showing the gaming state and effect mode of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning notification process of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the round of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode change process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a winning device mechanism of the gaming machine. FIG. 6 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, the structure of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base in which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed. And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (a player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3) Is provided with a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably provided, and a rear frame (not shown) supported rotatably by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). ing.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame is Since it is accommodated in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame components provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained. In addition, in the dish unit 8, respective cover members (an upper dish upper cover 8a, a lower dish cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In the state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

  A decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp which will be described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

  Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp / LED 27) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 7) described later is provided (see FIG. 7). . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 and is sensed from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics. Thereby, since the change in the display mode by light can be given, the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 that is provided below the upper tray 17 and can store, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p that can store a game ball, an upper plate upper cover 8a that is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decoration member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

  The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge outlet 20 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball path of a game ball paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 7), or a ball path cover (illustrated) that connects the discharge port and the supply port 21 to form a ball path. Abbreviation) is provided. When a game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the game ball stays near the payout port 20 while the game ball is paid out. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are transferred from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. 18 is sent.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the upper plate 17. By using this plated member 17b, the decoration effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

  The upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 7) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects as a player operates (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the arrangement configuration (position, direction) of the operation unit 9, in the drawing, as an example, the pressing operation button 9A protrudes from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 configured to be provided with a jog dial 9B is shown.

  In addition, about the front frame 3, in the part in the left side (namely, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) toward the player side from the surface (front surface), for example, fraud such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act by the unauthorized member is performed on various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the part.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an unauthorized act, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back side of the front frame 3 at a portion where the invading act by the unauthorized member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an unauthorized member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering portion, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to prepare a member for each of these functions separately. Therefore, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituting member includes a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. And a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball. In other words, the launching device 26 implements launching means.

  A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the above-described dish unit 8. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

  The firing handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, and in the support portion. A launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the sphere, a launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning on / off the launch stop switch, and an opening on the handle grip 26d are provided. And a handle cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased or decreased according to the rotation amount (rotation angle), and is stored in the upper plate 17 by the driving force at that time. The game balls that have been played are launched toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the launch driving device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 7) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 7). Inside the launcher 26, there is provided a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times. The game ball is fired by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction. The interval between game balls is 0.66 seconds.

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by a protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

  Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed in accordance with the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b, and the launching solenoid (not shown) It is known to change the firing strength of the game ball by changing the power supplied to the abbreviation). However, the launching device 26 according to the present embodiment is configured to rotate the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b. A launching spring (not shown) that interlocks with the launching spring and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (clamping) the launching spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the turning amount of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the turning amount of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b to increase or weaken the degree of winding (clamping) of the launching spring. Increases or decreases the firing strength.

  The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the dish unit 8 in the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper dish 17 and the lower dish 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can flow and roll. doing. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first start port 32, a second start port 33, a blade member 34 that opens and closes the second start port 33, a passing gate 35, First big prize opening 36A, first big prize opening 36B, second big prize opening 37A, first big prize opening shutter 361A that opens and closes the first big prize opening 36A, and first big that opens and closes the first big prize opening 36B Winning port shutter 361B, second large winning port shutter 371A that opens and closes the second large winning port 37A, specific region 38A and non-specific region 38B located below the first large winning port 36A, discharge ports 38X and 38Y, specific Displacement member 39 that opens and closes the region 38A, a plurality of general winning ports 40, an out port 41, an upper movable effect member 42A, a lower movable effect member 42B, a cover member 43, a rolling region 372 provided in the cover member 43, a liquid crystal Display device 4, and a LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first start port 32, the second start port 33, the passing gate 35, the first big winning port 36A, the first big winning port 36B, the second big winning port 37A, the specific area. A winning area is formed by 38A and the general winning opening 40. FIG. 3 shows a state where the cover member 43 is removed. In the present embodiment, the first grand prize winning port 36A and the first grand prize winning port 36B are appropriately referred to as a first grand prize winning port 36.

  The guide rail 30 includes an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30 </ b> B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged on the inner side of the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The stage 31 distributes the flow area of the game ball in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or a stage 31 or the like driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game ball wins one of the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, the first grand prize opening 36A, the first big prize opening 36B, the second big prize opening 37A, and the general prize opening 40. If the player does not win, or if the player passes through the passage gate 35 and does not win after that, the player will be recovered by being discharged from the outlet 41.

  Note that winning means that the game ball passes the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, thereby giving a situation advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33, symbol lottery, winning ball, etc. described later). It means to do. At this time, passing of the winning area by the game ball means simply passing, and entering the winning area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, the passing and the entering are substantially synonymous. Therefore, both the passing of game balls to the winning area and the winning ball lead to winning, so in the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, “passing” and “winning” have the same meaning for the winning area. Use. The passing of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V winning”.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, since the launch force applied to the game ball is generally small, the game ball flows down mainly on the left side of the stage 31. In addition, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball flows down mainly on the right side of the stage 31. In general, the method of hitting the game ball to the left of the stage 31 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball to the right of the stage 31 is called “right-handed”. A game ball fired by “right-handed” (an example of a game medium fired in a predetermined direction) basically flows down the right side of the stage 31 and reaches the first grand prize opening shutter 361A, and the first When the big prize opening shutter 361A, the second big prize opening shutter 371A, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are closed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B. It will roll up sequentially.

  The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 provide a lottery opportunity on the condition that the game ball wins (enters), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives the opportunity to do. If it adds, the 1st start port 32 and the 2nd start port 33 will realize the passage field.

  The first start port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins the first start port 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 32 is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 7).

  The second start port 33 is provided directly below the first start port 32. When a game ball wins the second start port 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The second start port 33 is determined to be difficult to win by a blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 33 is detected by the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 7).

  The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to have a forward tilting / retreating posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start port 33, This is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win a game ball at the start port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 7). In other words, the blade member 34 realizes an opening / closing member (moving member).

  Note that the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to one that opens and closes the blade member 34 in the front-rear direction, but for example, a so-called electric tulip type that widens the starting port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. Or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the start port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of a game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by a passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 7). Even if a game ball wins the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37A are opened in the hit gaming state (big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.
The first big winning opening 36 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that game balls can be won one by one. A first big prize opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36A is provided in the vicinity of the first big prize opening 36A. The winning of the game ball to the first big prize opening 36A is detected by the first big prize opening first count switch 360A (see FIG. 7). A first big prize opening shutter 361B for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36B is provided in the vicinity of the first big prize opening 36B. The winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 36B is detected by the first big winning opening second count switch 360B (see FIG. 7).

  The second large winning opening 37A is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large lateral dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. In the vicinity of the second big prize opening 37A, a second big prize opening shutter 371A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of the game ball to the second big prize opening 37A is detected by the second big prize opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 7).

The first grand prize winning port 36A, the first grand prize winning port 36B, and the second major prize winning port 37A are provided substantially on the right side of the first starting port 32. The second big prize opening 37A is provided between the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B. More specifically, the second big prize opening 37A is provided on the left side of the first big prize opening 36A and on the right side of the first big prize opening 36B, and is more than the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B. It is provided at the top. In addition, about the position where 36 A of 1st grand prize opening, the 1st big prize opening 36B, and the 2nd big prize opening 37A are arrange | positioned, it changes suitably according to the specification etc. of a game machine. Can do.
Next, a positional relationship (relationship between positions where a ball can be won) through which a game ball can pass at each big winning opening will be described. As shown in FIG. 5A, the position (height) that can pass through the first big prize opening 36A is a position where “sphere” is shown, in other words, the first big prize opening shutter 361A is closed. The position (height) that can be passed through the second big prize opening 37A is the position where the “sphere” is shown as shown in FIG. The height of the upper surface of the second big prize opening shutter 371A is closed. Similarly, the position (height) that can pass through the first big prize opening 36B is the height of the upper surface in the state where the first big prize opening shutter 361B is closed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the position that can pass through the first grand prize winning opening 36A and the position that can pass through the second big winning prize opening 37A are provided at the same or substantially the same height. A position that can pass through the 1st prize winning opening 36B is provided. In addition, a route (area) from a position through which a game ball can pass at each prize winning opening to each prize winning opening is referred to as an Nth passing area (N = 1, 2,...). It should be noted that the ball winning positions where each big winning opening is possible are not limited to the positional relationship described above. For example, the ball winning possible position of the first big winning opening 36A, the ball winning possible position of the second big winning opening 37A, and the ball winning possible position of the first big winning opening 36B may be provided in order.

The first grand prize opening shutter 361A moves horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, the first position that makes it easy to pass the game ball to the first big prize opening 36A, and the difficulty. The first big prize opening 36A is switched to the open state or the closed state by displacing to the second position, and is arranged so as to cover the first big prize opening 36A in the closed state. In other words, the first grand prize opening shutter 361A is changed to an open state in which a game ball can be won into the first big prize opening 36A and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by a first prize opening first shutter solenoid 3610A (see FIG. 7).
The first grand prize opening shutter 361B moves horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, the first position that makes it easy to pass the game ball to the first big prize opening 36B, and the difficulty. By shifting to the second position, the first big prize opening 36B is switched to the open state or the closed state, and is arranged so as to cover the first big prize opening 36B in the closed state. That is, the first grand prize opening shutter 361B is changed so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 36B and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by the big prize opening second shutter solenoid 3610B (see FIG. 7).
In addition, the first grand prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are simultaneously controlled to open and close, and the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B are simultaneously opened and closed.

  The second grand prize opening shutter 371A opens and closes so as to make a forward leaning / retreating attitude in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, the passage of the game ball to the second big winning opening 37A. By displacing between the easy first position and the difficult second position, the second big prize opening 37A is switched to the open state or the closed state, and the second big prize opening 37A is covered in the closed state. Are arranged as follows. That is, the second grand prize opening shutter 371A is configured to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 37A and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by a big prize opening shutter solenoid 3710 (see FIG. 7).

  The specific area 38A is an area through which a game ball that has won the first grand prize opening 36A can subsequently pass, and the non-specific area 38B is a game that has won the first big prize opening 36A but has not passed the specific area 38A. The ball and the game ball that has won the first big prize opening 36 </ b> B are areas where the ball can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. When the game ball that has won the first grand prize opening 36A passes through the specific area 38A, it passes through the discharge port 38X and is led to the back of the game board 1 and collected. The game balls that have won the first grand prize opening 36A but have not passed through the specific area 38A, and the game balls that have won the first big prize opening 36B, pass through the discharge port 38Y and are led behind the game board 1. It is recovered.

Corresponding to the first grand prize opening 36A, a first grand prize opening first count switch 360A is arranged. Detected by 360A. A first grand prize port second count switch 360B is arranged corresponding to the first grand prize port 36B. It is detected by 360B.
Corresponding to the specific area 38A, a specific area switch 380A is arranged, and the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged corresponding to the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided near the specific region 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to an open state or a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 is displaced so as to change between an open state (easy state) where the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is easy and a closed state (difficult state) where V winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by a solenoid 390 (see FIG. 7). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball in which the V winning is impossible passes through the non-specific area 38B.

In other words, the first grand prize port 36A, the first grand prize port 36B, the first grand prize port shutter 361A, the first grand prize port shutter 361B, the first grand prize port first shutter solenoid 3610A, the first grand prize port. The mouth second shutter solenoid 3610B, the first big prize opening first count switch 360A, the first big prize opening second count switch 360B, the specific area 38A, and the specific area switch 380A realize a second variable prize apparatus. The second variable winning device can be displaced between a first state in which a game medium is easily received and a second state in which a game medium is difficult to be received, and has a specific area through which the game medium can pass.
The second big prize opening 37A, the second big prize opening shutter 371A, the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 3710, and the second big prize opening count switch 370 realize a first variable prize winning device. The first variable prize-winning device is displaceable between a first state in which a game medium is easily received and a second state in which a game medium is difficult to be received.
The displacement member 39 and the displacement member solenoid 390 realize a variable member.

  One or more general winning ports 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 40, a lottery is not performed, but a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 7). The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non-probability / non-short-time gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probable. There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming state) that becomes higher than the non-temporary gaming state, and a time-short gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probabilistic non-temporary gaming state, and the special symbol in the normal gaming state When the lottery is won, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state (an example of a specific gaming state).

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning to the second starting port 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric projectile. This state is a so-called “electric support”, and it becomes easy to store a reserved ball of a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game ball by winning the second start opening 33. More specifically, the short-time gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (first short-time gaming state), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (second short-time gaming state). A gaming state) means a state in which at least one of a state in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (third time short gaming state). For example, the short-time gaming state includes a state in which the first short-time gaming state, the second short-time gaming state, and the third short-time gaming state proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a short time gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In the big hit gaming state, after the big hit gaming state that has succeeded in winning the V prize in the specific area 38A, the player must make a transition to the probability change / short time gaming state (the normal change state in which the probability changing gaming state is in the short time gaming state). The probabilistic / non-time-saving gaming state (the non-probability-changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, ie, the normal gaming state) is not changed. On the other hand, if the big hit gaming state is completed without a V winning in the specific area 38A without succeeding in the non-V winning, the normal gaming state that is the non-probability variable gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the big winning gaming state ends. It is supposed to move to.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state is over, for example, in the event of 70 special symbol lotteries (70 special symbol variation display or stop display) in the probability variation / short time gaming state, It shifts to the probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 30 or 70 special symbol lottery (30 or 70 special symbol variation display or stop display) was performed in the non-probability change and short-time game state , It is designed to shift to a non-probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the probabilistic / short-time gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends.
Hereinafter, the probability variation gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. Is arranged. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotating operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the first grand prize winning port 36 </ b> A, the first grand prize winning port 36 </ b> B, and the rolling region 372, and is attached below the passing gate 35. The cover member 43 forms a first grand prize winning port 36A and a first grand prize winning port 36B by opening a part of its upper end surface. Further, a rolling region 372 is provided on the upper end surface of the cover member 43 between the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the first big winning opening 36 </ b> A. Such a cover member 43 is disposed so as to cover the first big prize opening first count switch 360A, the first big prize opening second count switch 360B, the specific area switch 380A, the non-specific area switch 380B, and the like.
The rolling region 372 is not limited to the configuration provided in the cover member 43. For example, the structure provided in the game board 1 may be sufficient.

[Winning device mechanism]
Here, the winning device mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5A is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the second large winning opening shutter 371A is closed (when closed), and FIG. 5B is a left side view of the upper portion of the winning device mechanism in FIG. And (c) is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the second large winning opening shutter 371A is opened (when opened), and (d) is a left side view of the upper portion of the winning device mechanism in (c). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in the present embodiment, the winning device mechanism includes a first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, a first big prize opening second count switch 360B, a first big prize opening shutter 361A, This is realized including the first big prize opening shutter 361B, the second big prize opening shutter 371A, the rolling region 372, the specific region 38A, the non-specific region 38B, the discharge ports 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39.

In the present prize winning mechanism, a first big prize opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36A is provided in the upper right corner. A first grand prize port first count switch 360A, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and a discharge port 38X are sequentially provided below the first grand prize port shutter 361A (directly below in this example). .
A rolling area 372 is provided at the lower left of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, and a first big prize opening shutter 361B is provided at the lower left of the rolling area 372. A first grand prize port second count switch 360B is provided below the first big prize port shutter 361B (directly below in this example).
In the prize winning device mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the bottom.

  In a state where the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the first big prize opening shutter 361B, and the second big prize opening shutter 371A are closed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A is the upper stage, the rolling area 372 is the middle stage, and the first Each component has a staircase shape such that the big prize opening shutter 361B is in the lower stage. Therefore, in a state where each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the game ball reaches the approximate center of the rolling region 372 within 2 to 2.1 seconds from the start of “right-handed” (start of the launch operation).

  Next, when a game ball reaches each of the first grand prize port shutter 361A, the second big prize port shutter 371A, and the first big prize port shutter 361B, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is open Will be described.

(When the game ball reaches the first grand prize opening shutter 361A, the first big prize opening shutter 361A is open)
The game ball passes through the first big winning opening first count switch 360 </ b> A and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific region 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball passes through the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided below without passing through the specific region 38A.

(When the game ball reaches the second grand prize opening shutter 371A, the second big prize opening shutter 371A is open)
As shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the game ball passes through the second big prize opening 37A, is led to the back side of the main prize winning device mechanism, and passes through the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. There is no.

(When the game ball reaches the first big prize opening shutter 361B, the first big prize opening shutter 361B is opened)
The game ball passes through the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided below after passing through the first big winning opening second count switch 360B. Note that the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening second count switch 360B does not pass through the specific area 38A.

  Next, the LED unit 5 will be described with reference to FIG. The LED unit 5 notifies each player of the gaming state and the lottery result. As shown in FIG. 6, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, A second special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59 are provided.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory when the game ball wins the passing gate 35. The lottery result for “game” is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be turned on in red and blue, for example. In the normal symbol game, the LED lamp 511 is lit in red when winning, while it is lit in blue when lost in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is allowed. In addition, other lighting modes may be used as the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, for example, the lighting state or the blinking state in the case of winning, and the lighting state in the case of losing. It may be.

  In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing a variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524. In this case, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display that has been put on hold for performing the variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are positioned on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, and 524 are turned off. When the number of holdings is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522, and 523 are turned on, and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holds is “4”, all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are lit.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the “special symbol game” and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 32, and the first The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port 33, and the second The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In other words, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize identification information display means (display means).

  The variation display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED and the like, and each segment individually turning on and off. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the second special symbol are different from each other. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the big hit gaming state, such as “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2” indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state can be made after the jackpot gaming state ends. There are nominal jackpot symbols and nominal jackpot symbols such as “Time Short 1” and “Time Short 2” which indicate that the jackpot game state is indeterminate and can shift to the short time gaming state (see FIG. 8). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, such as “probability variation 3” to “probability variation 5” indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state can be made after the jackpot gaming state ends. There are nominal big hit symbols and nominal small hit symbols such as “small hit 1” and “small hit 2” that trigger the transition to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 8). The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554. When the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the first starting port 32, the first special symbol for the next special symbol game is displayed. The number of times the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the screen can be executed (the number of hold) is displayed.
The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564. When the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Or, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the second starting port 33, it is reserved for the symbol variation display for the special symbol game after the next time. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (the number of suspensions) is displayed.
Each of the 1st special symbol reservation display part 55 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display part 56 is arranged side by side up and down, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display part 52. The display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the hold number by the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are moved to the first start port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. A game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 7) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 7) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 that has been suspended The symbol variation display is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second special symbol display unit 54. 2 The number of variable display suspensions of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of a game ball at the start port 33 is four at the maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (FIG. 7) is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory (start memory information), and the information of the four first special symbol games that are held is stored in the first special symbol start memory area ( 1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which is stored as the start storage. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area ( 0) is stored as the start memory, and the information of the second special symbol game for the four times held is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Remembered. Accordingly, the total number of winning holds in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 Further, the winning hold to the first start port 32 and the hold of the winning hold to the second start port 33 may be displayed.

  The round display section 59 is lit while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, for example, when the number of rounds is 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “16R”), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 14 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “14R”), the LED lamp 592 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 8 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “8R”), the LED lamp 593 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 2 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “2R”), the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned on and the LED lamp 593 is turned off. Note that the number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may indicate the number of orders indicating the order in which round games are executed sequentially. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16R”, “12th round”, “12R”, etc., and when the latter is meant, for example, “16th round”, “12th round” And so on. In the following description, “round game” may be simply referred to as “round”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged at the approximate center so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of winning lottery based on winning of game balls to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images relating to the game, for example, an identification pattern for performance, an effect image in the normal game state, an effect in the big hit game state An image, a demonstration image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the variation of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first start port 32 or the second start port 33. In other words, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 can execute notification means (effect execution means) that can execute predetermined notifications. ).

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 7, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine has a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for performing various controls relating to the game, and a sub-control as a sub-control means for controlling effects and the like according to the progress of the game. Circuit 70.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 62. In other words, the main CPU 61 determines the specific game state transition determination means, the game state control means, the special game state control means, and the round game execution means (first round game execution means and second round game execution means), advantageous game. Various means such as execution means (first advantageous game execution means and second advantageous game execution means) are realized.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start port switch 320 disposed behind the first start port 32. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330 receive a predetermined detection signal as a winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. This is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected with a pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 350, a normal symbol lottery is performed on the assumption that the game ball has won the pass gate 35. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may make it do.

  The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. Thereby, the pass gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning port left switch 400A and a general winning port right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning port 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first big prize opening first count switch 360A arranged corresponding to the first big prize opening 36A. The first big winning opening first count switch 360A is for counting the number of winning game balls to the first big winning opening 36A. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the first big winning opening first count switch 360A, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. Dispensing to the plate 17 or the lower plate 18 is performed.
The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first big prize opening second count switch 360B arranged corresponding to the first big prize opening 36B. The first big winning opening second count switch 360B is for counting the number of winning game balls to the first big winning opening 36B. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first big winning port second count switch 360B, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as the winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. Dispensing to the plate 17 or the lower plate 18 is performed. In the present embodiment, the first big winning opening first count switch 360A and the first big winning opening second count switch 360B are appropriately referred to as a first big winning opening counting switch 360.

  Connected to the main control circuit 60 is a second grand prize port count switch 370 disposed behind the second grand prize port 37A. The second grand prize opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the second big prize opening 37A. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the second big winning port count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 or the lower plate 17 or lower Dispensing to the plate 18.

  The first grand prize port first count switch 360A, the first grand prize port second count switch 360B, and the second grand prize port count switch 370 include a first grand prize port 36A, a first grand prize port 36B, and A predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 60 when the game ball passes through the second big prize opening 37A.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that V is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a non-V winning is made when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit gaming state.

The main control circuit 60 opens and closes the first big prize opening 36A. The first big prize opening first shutter solenoid 3610A for driving the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening 36B are opened. The first big prize opening second shutter solenoid 3610B that drives the mouth shutter 361B and the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 3710 that drives the second big prize opening shutter 371A that opens and closes the second big prize opening 37A are exclusive. To control.
Thereby, for example, the first grand prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B, and the game ball In the situation where the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B are at least closed, the second big prize port shutter 371A is driven so as to change to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win. It is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second big prize opening 37A and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball. The second grand prize opening shutter 371A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 37A and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. In a situation where the second grand prize opening 37A is at least closed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are used to play game balls to the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B. It is driven so as to change between an open state in which winning can be won and a closed state in which winning of a game ball is impossible or difficult.
The first big prize opening 36A, the first big prize opening 36B, and the second big prize opening 37A by the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the first big prize opening shutter 361B, and the second big prize opening shutter 371A. The release driving is performed when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 and is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode on the normal symbol display unit 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and a game ball enters the second start port 33. It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in a gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state (in this embodiment, “non-probability change / non-short-time gaming state”) is 10/257, and the blade member 34 The probability of opening is lower than in the high probability state (short time gaming state). On the other hand, the normal symbol hit probability in the high probability state is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. Further, the number of normal symbols that become a winning symbol in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second start port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

  The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. As a result, when the round game, which will be described later, is being executed in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed state even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A or difficult, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 displays the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 when the game ball is detected by the first start port 320 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. The first one based on the winning of a game ball at the first start port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 The number of the special symbol variable display execution (start) is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the first special symbol that has been reserved as the number of the reserved symbols relating to the first special symbol is started.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol hold display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 330, the second special symbol hold display unit 56 The second based on the winning of a game ball at the second start port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of suspension (execution) of the special symbol variation display (ie, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol) is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning.

  In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of suspensions in which the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 places the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 in the upper limit. When the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of the variable display hold numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 each. (That is, up to 4 detection times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable symbol display, the number of holdings is again added up to four.

  When the number of first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games corresponding to four holding numbers is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, in the case of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of the second special symbol game held is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings is 4 in the main RAM 63. 2 are sequentially stored as starting memories in the special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4).

  Therefore, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is 8 in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol are displayed. The number of hold displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display section 55 is also four.

  The opened state of the first grand prize port 36A and the first grand prize port 36B by the first grand prize port shutter 361A and the first grand prize port shutter 361B is the first grand prize port count switch 360 (first grand prize port first 1 The count value (number of winning game balls) by the count switch 360A and the first grand prize opening second count switch 360B) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 winning numbers), or a predetermined opening time described later is set. It is maintained until one of the conditions such as elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B has elapsed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A is set to the first big prize opening 36A. , And the first big prize opening shutter 361B is driven to close the first big prize opening 36B.

  In the opened state of the second big prize opening 37A by the second big prize opening shutter 371A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second big prize opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (for example, ten prizes). Or, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as a predetermined later-described opening time elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big prize opening 37A has elapsed, the second big prize opening shutter 371A is driven to close the second big prize opening 37A. The

  In the big hit gaming state, based on a preset big prize opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later, the first big prize opening 36 (the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B) and the second big prize opening. The open state and the closed state of 37A are repeated. In the big hit game state, each of the first big prize port 36 and the second big prize port 37A is in an open state and a closed state for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a big prize port opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called “round game”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first grand prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37A is closed by one round game, the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37A is opened as the next round game. These states are also referred to as “inter-round game”, “inter-round interval”, or simply “interval”. In one round game, each of the first grand prize port 36 and the second big prize port 37A may be opened and closed multiple times. In one round game, the opening / closing states of the first grand prize winning port 36 and the second big prize winning port 37A are exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big prize opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big prize opening is continuously closed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from that of the big hit game state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game. In the small hit gaming state of the present embodiment, the first big winning opening 36 is opened two times or three times. It is prescribed. Of course, in the small hit gaming state, control may be performed so that an arbitrary or specific special winning opening is opened only once, or repeatedly opened a plurality of times.
This small hit game state is a game state that shifts when a small hit is made by special symbol lottery. The game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, in the non-probability changing gaming state, when the small hit win is made and the game state is shifted to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state remains the non-probability changing gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probable gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit win is made in the probability variation gaming state and a transition is made to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the small hit gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability change gaming state before shifting to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with respect to “round” with numbers such as 1 round or 1st round, for example, 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc., simply “R In a single round game, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37A is opened a predetermined number of times. When it has been reached, the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37A are closed, and the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37A are not opened for the remaining number of times of opening. The round game is ended.

  In a specific round game in which the first big prize opening 36 is opened in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. Thus, the specific area 38A is in an open state and a closed state in a specific round game in the big hit game state. That is, in a specific round game, there is a possibility that a game ball passes through the specific area 38A and wins a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball is temporarily placed in the first big prize opening 36A. Even if a prize is won, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A or is in a difficult state. That is, the types of jackpot gaming state (specific game state) include a jackpot gaming state that does not include a specific round game and a jackpot gaming state that includes a specific round game.

  In the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made up of numbers, except for specific cases, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to know that it is a “hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, in any one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to “big hit” that can be obtained by many balls. When the display is stopped, the combination of effect decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 has a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in a plurality of symbol rows) In addition, an effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  For example, the main CPU 61 included in the main control circuit 60 has a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first start area (second start port 33). ) Functions as a specific gaming state transition judging means for judging whether or not to transition to (1).

  In addition, for example, the main CPU 61 may be provided on the condition that the determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination unit shifts to the specific game state is obtained, or on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display unit in a specific manner. Moreover, it functions as a game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state.

  In addition, for example, the main CPU 61 indicates that the specific game state transition determination unit causes the specific game state to transition to the specific game state after the specific game state has been completed on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state. Special gaming state control (probability changing gaming state) in which the determination result is relatively easily obtained, in other words, special gaming state control for controlling the identification information to be easily displayed in a specific manner on the display means (probability changing gaming state) Functions as a means. Note that the main CPU 61 can be controlled to the special gaming state until the number of times of display of the identification information by the display means reaches a predetermined number after the end of the specific gaming state.

  Further, for example, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (second big prize opening shutter 371A) to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state (round). It functions as first round game execution means (first advantageous game execution means) for executing a game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as the first round game execution means can perform control to change the first variable winning device to the first mode and the second mode multiple times during execution of at least one round game. .

Further, for example, the main CPU 61 changes the second variable prize-winning device (the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B) to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state. ) Function as second round game execution means (second advantageous game execution means) that executes a round game (round game) that is varied a predetermined number of times.
In addition, for example, the main CPU 61 functioning as the second round game execution means sets the total time for which the second variable winning device is in the first state as the second round game to the first time (for example, 5.1 seconds). It is prescribed and when the second variable winning device is in the first state, it is difficult to pass round game in which the variable members can be in the easy state for the second time (for example, 0.1 second) in total. (E.g., 1R of “winning pattern 3” described later) and the time when the second variable winning device is in the first state is defined as the first time in total, and the second variable winning device is in the first state. In this case, an easy-to-pass round game in which the variable members can be in an easy state for a third time (for example, 5.1 seconds) longer than the second time in total (for example, “Success Pattern 2” described later) 1R)], and It is feasible.
Further, for example, as the second round game, the total time for which the second variable winning device is in the first state is defined as the first time (for example, 7.1 seconds), and the second variable winning device is the first. When it is in the 1 state, it is difficult to pass round game (for example, “Rating pattern 4” described later) that can change the variable members into the easy state for the second time (for example, 0.1 second) in total. ) And the second round game is defined as a third time (e.g., 3.1 seconds) shorter than the first time in which the second variable winning device is in the first state, When the variable winning device is in the first state, an easy-to-pass round game in which the variable members can be in an easy state for a fourth time (for example, 3.1 seconds) longer than the second time in total (for example, For example, 1R of “hit pattern 1” described later ) And, it is possible to run.

Here, the big hit gaming state is, for example, a specific gaming state A in which the first round game executing means executes a predetermined number of first round games and the second round game executing means executes only a difficult-to-pass round game a predetermined number of times. A specific game state B in which the first round game executing means executes a predetermined number of first round games and the second round game executing means executes a predetermined number of second round games including easy-to-pass round games; Regardless of whether or not the special gaming state control means controls the special gaming state, whether or not the probability that the specific gaming state transition judging means judges that the transition is made is the same, and whether or not the gaming medium has passed through the specific area Regardless of the specific game state C that does not shift to a disadvantageous game state after the end of the specific game state than before the transition to the specific game state, It is realized a non-specific game state.
Further, in the specific game state B and the specific game state C, the displacement mode of the second variable winning device is the same or substantially the same.

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, including the functions of each means of the main CPU 61 described above.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, other readable / writable storage media can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when power is cut off.

  The various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first big prize opening first shutter solenoid 3610A, a first big prize opening second shutter solenoid 3610B, a second big prize opening shutter solenoid 3710, a blade member solenoid 340, A displacement member solenoid 390 and an external terminal plate 80 are included.

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall, or a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots. For data communication.

  The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a pass gate switch 350, a first grand prize port first count switch 360A, and a first big prize port number. A two-count switch 360B, a second big prize opening count switch 370, a specific area switch 380A, a non-specific area switch 380B, a general winning opening left switch 400A, a general winning opening right switch 400B, and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation of the hall manager.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / firing control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84. In other words, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize game value giving means.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal for requesting lending of game balls in accordance with a player's operation, and signals can be transmitted to and received from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the general winning opening 40. Ten game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37A.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 supplies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) when the launching handle 26b of the launching device 26 is gripped by a player and rotated in a clockwise direction. Control is performed to launch the game ball toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes a timer interrupt process as an interrupt process even during execution of a main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed in response to an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60 and is configured to be supplied with commands from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. A circuit 76, a sound control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79; The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the audio control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down button switch 90A provided on the push-down button 9A and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In other words, the sub CPU 71 realizes notification means, effect mode determination means, and effect mode control means. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 implement storage means. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

  For example, if the liquid crystal display device 4 does not pass the game medium to the specific area in one specific game state (for example, “small hit 2”), the special game state is terminated after the end of the one specific game state. It functions as an informing means capable of informing whether or not it is controlled. In addition, for example, the liquid crystal display device 4 may display a special game state after the end of one specific game state when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific game state (for example, “one per small game”). Regardless of whether or not the gaming state is controlled, it functions as a notification means capable of performing notification in the same mode as notification regarding the gaming state. In addition, for example, the liquid crystal display device 4 allows game media to pass through a specific area in one specific game state (for example, a big hit of “probability 5”) and another specific game state (for example, a hit of “one small hit”). In this case, it functions as a notification means capable of notifying that the game medium has passed through the specific area.

The sub CPU 71 is, for example, an effect mode determining means that can determine any effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including the first effect mode (normal mode, first short time mode, second short time mode, probability change mode). Function as. Further, for example, the sub CPU 71 functions as an effect mode control unit that can be controlled to the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination unit.
For example, the effect mode determining means passes the game medium to the specific area during the second advantageous game (for example, middle release that allows V winning) that is executed in one specific game state (for example, hitting “probability 5”). The first effect mode (for example, the probability variation mode) can be determined on the condition that this is done.
In addition, for example, the effect mode determining means is provided on the condition that the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the second advantageous game that is executed in one specific game state (for example, “one per small game”). An effect mode (for example, the first time reduction mode) different from the one effect mode (for example, the probability variation mode) can be determined.
In addition, for example, the effect mode determining means is configured to execute the first effect mode on the condition that the special game state (for example, the probability change game state) ends when being controlled to the first effect mode (for example, the probability change mode). Different production modes can be determined.
Further, for example, the effect mode determination means is a case where the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific game state (for example, “small hit 2”), and the special game after the end of the one specific game state. When the special control state is controlled by the state control means, the first effect mode (for example, the probability change mode) can be determined.
Further, for example, when the effect mode control means is controlling to the first effect mode, one specific game state (for example, hit “probability 5”) or another specific game state (for example, “small hit 1 ”And can be controlled to the first effect mode on the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in the specific game state under the transition control. .

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. For example, the display control circuit 76 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 77 is for performing control related to sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that performs control related to sound, a sound data ROM that stores various sound data, a sound signal, and the like. An amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the signal is included. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. In response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71, the sound source IC is used to select one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (oscillates) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the push-down operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9. Etc.) may be controlled.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
Next, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, the hit probability (big hit probability) of a special symbol including a small hit probability, which will be described later, is 1/80 (25/2000) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state). ), It is 1/25 (80/2000) when the probability is high (probability game state). The probability of hitting a small hit gaming state is 0 for the first special symbol and 1/25 (80/2000) for the second special symbol. In addition, the probability at the time of the low probability and the high probability in the big hit probability is not limited to the above-described one. It is possible to appropriately adopt a probability that a high probability is easier to win than a low probability. Further, the small hit probability is not limited to that described above. You may make it win also about a 1st special symbol. In this case, the winning probability in the other special symbol may be higher or lower than the one special symbol, or may be the same.

The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. The digestion order may be a winning order, or the first special symbol may be preferential digestion.
As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to a maximum of 70 times as the number of games (the number of variations of the special symbol) is implemented. Note that the number of STs is not limited to that described above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, the winning opening opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is “hit pattern 1”, 16R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is “first” It is “Special design small-probable big hit”. The probability (selection rate) of “probability variation 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

  The big hit symbol “probability variation 2” of the first special symbol is “hit pattern 2”, 8R is given as the number of rounds, and the bonus content is “medium probability variation big hit in the first special symbol”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probability 2” of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

The big special symbol “Time 1” of the first special symbol is “Hit pattern 3”, the number of rounds 8R is given, and the bonus content is “First special symbol Medium, short and big bonus”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “time reduction 1” of the first special symbol is set to 30/100.
The first special symbol jackpot symbol “time 2” is “hit pattern 4”, the number of rounds 16R is given, and the bonus content is “first special symbol jackpot”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “time reduction 2” of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

The big special symbol “probability variation 3” of the second special symbol is “hit pattern 5”, the round number 14R is given, and the bonus content is “second special symbol great probability variation big hit”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probability variation 3” of the second special symbol is set to 3/100.
The big special symbol “probability variation 4” of the second special symbol is “hit pattern 6”, the round number 16R is given, and the bonus content is “second special symbol extra large variation variation big hit”. The selection rate of the big special symbol “probability variation 4” of the second special symbol is set to 2/100.
The big special symbol “probability variation 5” of the second special symbol is “success pattern 7”, the round number 2R is given, and the bonus content is “per second special symbol”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probability variation 5” of the second special symbol is set to 95/100.

The small special symbol “small hit 1” of the second special symbol is “hit pattern 8”, and the bonus content is “per second special symbol”. The selection rate of the small hit symbol “small hit 1” of the second special symbol is set to 70/100.
The small special symbol “small hit 2” of the second special symbol is “winning pattern 9”, and the bonus content is “per second special symbol discrimination”. The selection rate of the small hit symbol “small hit 2” of the second special symbol is set to 30/100.
Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state does not have the concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.
Note that the number of rounds is not limited to 2R, 8R, 14R, and 16R, and a jackpot for other numbers of rounds may be provided. Also, the type of jackpot is not limited to those described above. The number of types of jackpots of the first special symbol may be increased, or the number of types of jackpots of the second special symbol may be increased. Further, the small hit types are not limited to two types, and may be one type or three or more types.

The number of winning prizes is set to count up to 10 for both the first and second winning prize openings 36A and 37A as the upper limit winning number per round. Although the count number (prescribed number / maximum number of winning prizes) of the big winning opening is “10”, it is not limited to this.
As for short-time performance (specification of short-time gaming state), when shifting to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the big hit of “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 5” for a high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state) If the game state does not change to the probability change gaming state after completion of the gaming state, it is up to 70 times in the non-probability change gaming state. The short-time gaming state is set to continue up to 30 times. Note that the time-saving performance may be more or less (including 0) than the number of probability-changing gaming states.
The number of winning balls is 3 per winning prize at the starting opening (first starting opening 32 and second starting opening 33), 10 per winning prize at the general winning opening 40, and the large winning opening (first It is set so that there are 15 winning prizes per winning prize 36A, first winning prize opening 36B, and second winning prize opening 37A). The number of prize balls is not limited to the above.
The normal symbol hit probability is set to 10/257 when the probability is low, and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of symbols per normal symbol is set to one. The probabilities at the low probability and the high probability are not limited to those described above. It is possible to appropriately adopt a probability that a higher probability is easier to win than a low probability. Moreover, you may not make it win at the time of low probability. Further, the number of symbols per ordinary symbol is not limited to that described above. Two or more may be sufficient. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that different open patterns are associated with each other.
The winning count when the second start port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit. Note that the second starting port count number (specified number / upper winning number) may be a value other than this.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to H are defined as one round opening / closing patterns (one round opening / closing patterns) for the first big prize opening 36. As shown in FIG. 10, a plurality of open / close patterns I to K are defined as the 1 round open / close pattern for the second grand prize opening 37A. Note that the opening pattern of the special winning opening is not limited to the above 11 types. It may be 10 types or less, or 13 types or more.
The opening / closing patterns A to F and I to K are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing patterns G and H are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the small hit gaming state. Note that the opening / closing patterns G and H in the small hit gaming state are not defined as one round, but are shown together with other opening / closing patterns A to F and I to K for convenience. The first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37A are simply referred to as a big prize opening unless it is particularly necessary to distinguish them. The open / close patterns A to K shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are merely examples, and specific times for defining the open / close patterns may be other than illustrated.

(Opening and closing pattern of the first grand prize opening)
The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 12 s, and then the open state continues again for 3 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other open / close patterns B to H, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state.
The section in which the open state is 0.1 s is a short open in which the open state of the big prize opening is relatively short. In the section where the open state is 3 s, the open state of the big prize opening is longer than the short opening, and the middle opening is shorter than the long opening where the open state of the big winning opening is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, after a short opening occurs once, a middle opening occurs once through a closed state, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 3.1 s.
In the open state where the short is open, it is extremely difficult to win a game ball in the grand prize opening, and in the open state where the middle is open, it is easier to win the game ball in the big prize opening than in the short opening. In the open state, which is long open, it is easier to win a game ball in the grand prize opening than in the middle release. For convenience of explanation, a section in which the open state is 0.1 s or less is referred to as short open, a section in which the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 28 s is referred to as middle open, and a section in which the open state is 28 s or greater is referred to as long open.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 12 s, and then the open state continues again for 5 s. That is, in the open / close pattern B, after a short open occurs once, a middle open occurs once through a closed state, and the total open time of the open / close pattern B is 5.1 s. Although the total opening time is longer than the opening / closing pattern A, it may be the same or shorter.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 3 s, and then the open state continues again for 5 s. That is, the open / close pattern C is one in which a short open is generated once and then a middle open is generated once through a closed state, and the total open time of the open / close pattern C is 5.1 s.

  The open / close pattern D is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 3 s, and then the open state continues again for 7 s. That is, the open / close pattern D is one in which a short open is generated once, and then a middle open is generated once through a closed state, and the total open time of the open / close pattern D is 7.1 s. Although the total opening time is longer than the opening / closing pattern C, it may be the same or shorter.

  The open / close pattern E is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only for 0.1 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern E is a pattern in which a short-circuit opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern E is 0.1 s. It should be noted that the number of times the first grand prize opening 36 is opened may be two or more. The opening time may be a time other than the time described above.

  The open / close pattern F is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 11 s, and then the open state continues again for 1.6 s. That is, the open / close pattern F is a pattern in which a short open is generated once, and then a middle open is generated once through a closed state, and the total open time of the open / close pattern F is 1.7 s.

  In the open / close pattern G, the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 2 s, the open state is again 0.1 s, the closed state is 11 s, and then the open state continues again for 1.6 s. Open / close pattern. That is, the open / close pattern G is one in which a short opening occurs once, then a closed state occurs once, a short opening occurs once, and then a closed state occurs once, then a middle opening occurs once. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern G is 1.8 s. It should be noted that the number of times the first grand prize winning opening 36 is opened may be two times or less or four times or more. Further, the first grand prize opening 36 is opened three times, but the opening time is not limited to the above. Any one or a plurality of opening times may be shorter or longer than the opening time described above. Further, the closing time of the first grand prize winning opening 36 may be longer or shorter than the time described above.

  The open / close pattern H is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.9 s, the closed state is 13 s, and then the open state continues again for 0.9 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern H, the middle opening occurs once after the middle opening occurs once, and the middle opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern H is 1.8 s.

In addition, about opening-and-closing pattern AD, F, it is good also considering the frequency | count of opening as 1 time or 3 times or more. In any opening / closing pattern, the first big prize opening 36 is opened twice, but the opening time is not limited to the above. Either or both of the opening times may be shorter or longer than the opening time described above. Also, the closing time may be longer or shorter than the time described above.
In this embodiment, both the opening and closing plates (the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B) are always opened or closed, but only one of them is opened. May be.

(Opening and closing pattern of the 2nd big prize opening)
The open / close pattern I is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 1 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern I is one in which middle opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern I is 1 s.

  The open / close pattern J is an open / close pattern that remains open for 10 seconds. That is, the opening / closing pattern J is one in which middle opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern J is 10 s. Although the total opening time is longer than the opening / closing pattern I, it may be the same or shorter.

  The open / close pattern K is an open / close pattern that remains open for 28 s. That is, the open / close pattern K is a pattern in which the long open only occurs once, and the total open time of the open / close pattern K is 28 s. The total opening time is longer than that of the open / close patterns I and J, but may be the same or shorter for either one or both.

For the open / close patterns I to K, the number of times of opening the second big prize opening 37A may be two or more. Also, the opening time of the second grand prize opening 37A may be a time other than the time described above.
Further, in this embodiment, it is composed of one opening / closing plate (second big prize opening shutter 371A), but two or more may be provided. In this case, all or only a part may be opened.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The displacement member 39 is basically operated in conjunction with the open / close state of the first big winning opening 36 regardless of the big hit game state and the small hit game state. As shown in FIG. 11, the operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) of the displacement member 39 is, as a general rule, after the operation period in which the specific region 38A is opened is initially 0.1 s, and then the specific region 38A is closed. There is a non-operation period of 2 s, followed by an operation period of 0.1 s to be opened, and then a non-operation period of 9 s in which the specific region 38A is closed, and then the operation period continues again for 8 s. It is defined as a pattern. The total operation time of the displacement member operation pattern is 8.2 s. During the operation period of 0.1 s, since the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively short, V winning in the specific area 38A becomes extremely difficult. On the other hand, during the operation period of 8 s at the longest, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so that V winning in the specific area 38A is relatively easy. For the operation period of 8 s, in the first round in which the first big prize opening 36 is opened and closed, for example, the first big prize opening 36 is closed by reaching the upper prize number, for example, When a predetermined monitoring processing time (for example, 1098 ms) relating to a residual sphere described later has passed, the displacement member 39 is inoperative and the specific region 38A is in a closed state even before a predetermined 8s has elapsed. There is.

Different patterns may be provided for the opening pattern of the displacement member 39, or two or more types may be provided. For example, a pattern in which the second big prize opening 37A is always open while it is open, or a pattern in which opening and closing is always repeated at regular intervals (for example, every 2 seconds) may be executed instead.
When only one of the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B is opened, it may be opened and closed according to the above-described pattern only when the first big prize port shutter 361A is opened. .

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 9 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns).
The “hit pattern 1” is a hit pattern that is generated when the bonus “probability big hit 1” is defined and the number of rounds defined for the round that is generally released is defined as 16R.
In addition, the interval between rounds is the interval in which the grand prize opening is closed in the first round until the grand prize opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as an interval pattern between rounds, an interval pattern a having a closed state (closing time) of 1.3 s and an interval pattern b having 2 s are defined. .
In “hit pattern 1”, the intervals between all rounds are interval pattern a, the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in each of the 1Rth and 2Rth, and the first in all the 3rd to 16Rths. The two major winning openings 37A are defined to be an opening / closing pattern I. Note that both the 1R and 2R rounds can be entered into the first grand prize opening 36 and executed as a round in which a V prize can be placed in the specific area 38A (FIG. 13A).

  “Winning pattern 2” is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus “probability large hit 2” is specified and the prescribed round number is defined as 8R. In “hit pattern 2”, all the intervals between rounds are interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the open / close pattern B in each of the 1R and 2R, and the 2nd largest in the 3R to 8R. The winning opening 37A is defined to be an opening / closing pattern J. Note that both the 1R and 2R rounds can be entered into the first grand prize opening 36 and executed as a round in which a V prize can be placed in the specific area 38A (FIG. 14A).

  The “hit pattern 3” is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus “one per hour junior high” is set and the specified round number is specified as 8R. In “hit pattern 3”, all the intervals between rounds are interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in both the 1R and 2R, and in all the 3R to 8R. It is defined that the second big prize opening 37A becomes the opening / closing pattern J. It should be noted that although both the 1R and 2R can win the first big prize opening 36, it is executed as a round where V winning in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult (FIG. 14B). .

  The “hit pattern 4” is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus “2 per hour junior high” is set and the specified number of rounds is specified as 16R. In “hit pattern 4”, all the intervals between rounds are interval pattern a, the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in each of the 1R and 2R, and the second largest in the 3R to 8R. The winning opening 37A is defined to be the opening / closing pattern J, and the second large winning opening 37A is defined to be the opening / closing pattern K in the 9th to 16th eyes. It should be noted that both the 1R and 2R rounds can be awarded to the first big prize opening 36, but are executed as a round where V winning in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult (FIG. 13 (b)). .

  The “hit pattern 5” is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus “probable big hit 3” occurs and the prescribed round number is defined as 14R. In “hit pattern 5”, the intervals between all rounds are interval pattern a, the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the first and second rounds, and the second largest in the third to fourteenth rounds. It is defined that the winning opening 37A becomes an opening / closing pattern K. The first round and the second round are executed as a round similar to “hit pattern 2”.

  The “success pattern 6” is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus “probability large hit 4” occurs and the specified round number is 16R. In the “hit pattern 6”, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the first and second rounds, and the second largest in the third to sixteenth rounds. It is defined that the winning opening 37A becomes an opening / closing pattern K. The first round and the second round are executed as a round similar to “hit pattern 2”.

  The “success pattern 7” is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus “probability large hit 5” is specified and the specified number of rounds is specified as 2R. “Winning pattern 7” has one interval between rounds and is an interval pattern b. The first big prize opening 36 becomes an opening / closing pattern E at the 1Rth and the first big prize opening 36 is opened / closed at the 2Rth. It is defined to be pattern F. The 1R round is executed as a round where V winning in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult according to the opening / closing pattern E, and the 2R round is executed as a round enabling V winning in the specific area 38A according to the opening / closing pattern F. (FIG. 15A).

  The “hit pattern 8” is generated when the bonus “small hit 1” occurs, and the first big winning opening 36 is defined to be the open / close pattern G only once. That is, in the “hit pattern 8”, there is a possibility that a game ball may win the first big winning opening 36 and there is a possibility that a V win is given to the specific area 38A (FIG. 15B). Even if there is a V prize to 38A, it is executed as a case where it is not possible to shift to the probability change gaming state.

  The “hit pattern 9” is generated when the bonus “small hit 2” occurs, and the first big winning opening 36 is defined to be the open / close pattern H (FIG. 9) only once. That is, in the “winning pattern 9”, there is a possibility that a game ball may win the first big winning opening 36 and there may be a V win in the specific area 38A, but there is a V win in the specific area 38A. Even if it is, it will be executed on the assumption that it is not possible to enter the probability variation gaming state.

In each hit pattern, an open / close pattern is associated with each round in advance, but an open / close pattern other than the above may be associated. For example, instead of the opening / closing pattern A, the opening / closing pattern B may be used as the 1R-th pattern in “hit pattern 1”.
Further, the interval pattern may be one type or three or more types. Further, the time of the interval patterns a and b may be a time other than the above.
In addition, with regard to “hit pattern 1” to “hit pattern 6”, the round in which the first big prize opening is opened may be only the 1R round, and the 2R opening pattern may be the opening pattern of the second big prize opening. For example, the 2R open pattern may be the 3R open pattern.
In addition, regarding the “hit pattern 7”, one round (the prescribed number of rounds is 1R) and the opening pattern of the 1R as the opening / closing pattern G may be used. Thereby, since the opening / closing pattern of the first big prize opening and the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member 39 can be made the same, the “probability variation 5” and “ It is impossible to discriminate from “small hit 1” at all.

[Operations of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the “hit pattern 1” corresponding to the bonus “probable big hit 1” and the “hit pattern 4” corresponding to the bonus “short time big hit 2”]
Next, the operation timings of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in “hit pattern 1” and “hit pattern 4” will be described with reference to FIG. The description will focus on the 1R, and the description of other rounds will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown as an example in FIG. 13A, in the 1R of the “hit pattern 1”, the displacement member is activated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 11 with the start of the open state of the first big winning opening 36. By operating 39, the specific area 38A is brought into an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 36. More specifically, in the 1Rth, after the first big prize opening 36 ends the middle opening (section where the open state is 3 s) and is closed, the first big prize opening 36 to the first big prize opening When a predetermined monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining sphere remaining in the ball passage leading to the count switch 360 has elapsed, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, thereby causing the specific region. 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is in a closed state after an open state of about 5 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
Note that, also in the 2R of the “hit pattern 1”, the first big winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the 1R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13B as an example, in the 1R of “hit pattern 4”, with the start of the open state of the first big prize opening 36, based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating the displacement member 39, the specific region 38A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first big prize winning opening 36. More specifically, at the 1Rth, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first big prize opening 36 ends the middle opening (section where the open state is 7 s) and is closed, the displacement member 39 As a result, the specific region 38A remains in the closed state. In other words, the specific region 38A ends without being in the open state of 8s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
Note that, also in the second R of the “hit pattern 4”, the first big winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the first R.

[Operations of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the “hit pattern 2” corresponding to the bonus “probable big hit 2” and the “hit pattern 3” corresponding to the bonus “one hour hit big 1”]
Next, the operation timings of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in “hit pattern 2” and “hit pattern 3” will be described with reference to FIG. The description will focus on the 1R, and the description of other rounds will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown as an example in FIG. 14A, in the 1R of “hit pattern 2”, the displacement member is activated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating 39, the specific area 38A is brought into an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 36. More specifically, at the 1Rth, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first big prize opening 36 ends the middle opening (section where the open state is 5 s) and is closed, the displacement member 39 Is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, whereby the specific region 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific area 38A is in a closed state after an open state of about 7 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
It should be noted that, in the 2R of “hit pattern 2”, the first big prize opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in an open state and a closed state as in the 1R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B as an example, in the 1R of “hit pattern 3”, with the start of the open state of the first big prize opening 36, based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating the displacement member 39, the specific region 38A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first big prize winning opening 36. More specifically, at the 1Rth, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first big prize opening 36 ends the middle opening (section where the open state is 5 s) and is closed, the displacement member 39 As a result, the specific region 38A remains in the closed state. That is, in the specific area 38A, the 1R-th ends without being in the open state of 8s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
It should be noted that, in the 2R of “hit pattern 3”, the first big prize opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in an open state and a closed state as in the 1R.

[Operations of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the “hit pattern 7” corresponding to the bonus “probability big hit 5” and “hit pattern 8” corresponding to the bonus “small hit 1”]
Next, the operation timings of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in the “hit pattern 7” and “hit pattern 8” will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15 (a) as an example, at the 1R of “hit pattern 7”, the displacement member is activated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating 39, the specific area 38A is brought into an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 36. More specifically, at the 1Rth, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first grand prize winning opening 36 ends short-circuiting (a section in which the open state is 0.1 s) and is closed, the displacement By forcibly controlling the member 39 to maintain the non-operating state, the specific region 38A remains closed. That is, in the specific area 38A, the 1R-th ends without being in the open state of 8s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
When the first round ends, the second round starts after 2s of the interval between rounds has elapsed. Also at the 2R-th, with the start of the open state of the first big prize opening 36, the displacement member 39 is operated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. Thus, the specific region 38A is in an open state and a closed state.
In the second round, when the first big winning opening 36 ends the middle opening (section where the open state is 1.6 s) and is closed (end of the round section), when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses. The displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the specific region 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is in a closed state after an open state of about 2.6 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15B as an example, in the “hit pattern 8”, the displacement member 39 is based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. As a result of the operation, the specific area 38 </ b> A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first grand prize winning opening 36. More specifically, the displacement member 39 is forced when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first big prize opening 36 ends the middle opening (section where the open state is 1.6 s) and is closed. Thus, the specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state by being controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state. That is, the specific region 38A is in a closed state after an open state of about 4.6 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the “opening pattern 7” (opening / closing pattern E + interval pattern b + opening / closing pattern F) and “opening pattern 8” (pattern G) are the same open / close patterns. However, the opening / closing pattern need not be exactly the same, and may be substantially the same. For example, in the relationship between “hit pattern 7” and “hit pattern 8”, the opening time and / or closing time may be configured to be within 0.3 seconds.

[Game state and production mode of gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the gaming state and the rendering mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Note that the gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a normal mode, a first short time mode, a second short time mode, and a probability change mode are implemented as the effect modes in the normal game state.
This pachinko machine stays in any production mode by changing at least a part of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the sound output from the speakers 10a to 10c, and the light emission mode by the lamp / LED 27. It is possible to perform an effect that gives a different impression in each effect mode.
The normal mode is an effect mode in a non-probability / non-time-short game state. In the normal mode, an impression with an impression different from any of the first time reduction mode, the second time reduction mode, and the probability variation mode is performed.

  In the normal mode, a big hit based on the first special symbol is made, and after the big hit is finished, the normal mode is shifted to the first time reduction mode or the probability variation mode. More specifically, if a V win is made during the big hit, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the probability change mode. If the winner is selected, the lottery is shifted to the probability change mode. Migrate to Further, when the V prize is not won during the big hit, the mode shifts to the first time reduction mode.

The first short time mode is an effect mode in the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state and the time variation gaming state. The first time-short mode is an effect mode that gives an impression that the time-short mode is a relatively small number of games (the number of special symbol changes, that is, the number of special symbol games).
In the 1st time-short mode, it becomes a hit based on the second special symbol (“probable big hit 3” or “probable big hit 4”), and after the hit is finished, the first time-short mode is continued or the first time-short mode is changed Enter mode. More specifically, when the V winning is not made during the winning, the first time reduction mode is continued, and when the V winning is made during the winning, the mode is shifted to the probability changing mode.
In the first short-time mode, a hit based on the second special symbol (“small hit 2”) is made, and after the hit, the first short-time mode is continued or the first short-time mode is shifted to the probability variation mode. More specifically, the first time reduction mode is continued when the V prize is won during the win, or when the V prize is not won during the win, and when the winning game is not after the win. On the other hand, if the V is not won during winning and if the winning game is in the probability changing gaming state after the winning, the mode changes to the probability changing mode.
In the 1st time-saving mode, it becomes a hit based on the second special symbol (“probable big hit 5” or “small hit 1”). After the hit, the first time-saving mode is continued or the first time-saving mode is Transition to 2 o'clock short mode. More specifically, if the V prize is not won during the winning, the first time reduction mode is entered. If the player wins a V during the win and the winning game is not in the probable gaming state, the process shifts to the second time reduction mode.
When the time-saving gaming state is ended, the mode is shifted from the first time-saving mode to the normal mode. In S466, which will be described later, the first time reduction mode may be promoted to the second time reduction mode.

The second short time mode is a performance mode in the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state and the time variation gaming state. The second time reduction mode is an effect mode that gives an impression that the time reduction mode has a relatively large number of games.
In the second short time mode, the winning is based on the second special symbol, and after the winning is finished, the effect mode is continued or shifted in the same manner as in the first short time mode.
When the time-saving gaming state ends, the mode shifts from the second time-saving mode to the normal mode. In S466, which will be described later, the second time reduction mode may be promoted to the probability change mode.

The probability variation mode is a performance mode in the probability variation gaming state and the short time gaming state. The probability variation mode is an effect mode indicating that the probability variation gaming state is confirmed.
In the probability variation mode, the winning is based on the second special symbol, and after the winning is completed, the effect mode is basically continued or shifted in the same manner as in the first time reduction mode. However, in the probability variation mode, it becomes a hit based on the second special symbol (“5 per probability variation big” or “1 per small hit”), and when winning V during the winning, the probability variation mode continues after the winning is finished. It will be.
When the short-time gaming state (probability changing gaming state) ends, the mode changes from the probability changing mode to the normal mode.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
17 and 18 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S <b> 12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power interruption detection state is present. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power interruption detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set, and the process proceeds to S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S <b> 14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 7) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 18), and if it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, it proceeds to S16. Move processing.

  In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S17, and if it determines that there is no power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 18). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, moves the process to S30. .

  In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a display to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state in the case of the probability variation gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the start or end of the first fluctuation after power-on.

  In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S24, where the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting 8000H in the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S <b> 34, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process for the work area when the RAM is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S <b> 35, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. In the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S <b> 36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the rendering condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S42, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process proceeds to S37.

  In S <b> 42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the big winning opening that is opened when the big hit or the small hit occurs. Grand prize opening time timer, security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that an illegal act has occurred The process of updating various timers is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. Although described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts the winning determination random number value and the winning symbol determination random value in accordance with the detection signals from the first starting port switch 320 and the second starting port switch 330 and stores the big hit determination stored in the main ROM 62. With reference to a table (not shown), it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big winning and small winning lottery) has been won, and the result of determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process in S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random number value, and the normal symbol determining table stored in the main ROM 62 are determined. Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the winning symbol is used, and the result of the determination is stored. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if not winning, the determination result indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, 3 times in 1.3 seconds, or 4 times in 1.4 seconds, or 6 times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing member 34 is opened, and when the wing member 34 is in the open state, the game ball can easily win the second starting port 33. If this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 outputs a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. The process to memorize is performed. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variably displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for generating data related to game information signals to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the first start port switch 320 and the second switch detected by the special symbol related switch check process and the normal symbol related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 21) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350 and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 that is updated in accordance with the execution of the change display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process for storing in the main RAM 63 a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above-described steps. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs the security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and the LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED, the first grand prize opening shutter 361A, the first grand prize. Solenoid power is supplied for driving the solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 361B and the second big prize mouth shutter 371A and opens and closes the blade member 34. If this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning mouth related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main process, the main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in accordance with a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by one. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on the condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process in S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 starts from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a winning determination random number counter, a winning symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. The hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, a fixed timing every 2 ms is required to ensure this. I am trying to update with. If this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  In S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area has detected a winning. For example, when detecting a winning, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won. The switch input process in S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 receives game balls in the first grand prize opening 36A, the first grand prize opening 36B, the second major prize opening 37A, the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, and the general prize opening 40. If there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out a winning ball corresponding to a winning area whose bit is “1 (ON)” in accordance with the winning of a game ball from the payout device 83, and the set command Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command setting is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is finished, this timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times of execution (startup) of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of execution (startup) of the timer interrupt process reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S71.

  In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S <b> 72, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. The remaining ball monitoring timer reaches the ball path from the first grand prize port 36A to the first grand prize port first count switch 360A, or from the first grand prize port 36B to the first grand prize port second count switch 360B. This is a timer for measuring the remaining ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining balls remaining in the ball path from the second big prize opening 37A to the second big prize opening count switch 370. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S77, and determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is not “0”. , The process is moved to S73. When the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0” and the game is not in a round game, an error may be notified when the special winning opening count switch detects a game ball.

  In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S74.

  In S74, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining again whether or not the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S77, and determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. , The process is moved to S75.

  In S75, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the specific area 38A is being opened. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not open, it moves the process to S77, and if it determines that the specific area 38A is open, it moves the process to S76.

  In S76, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on a control signal based on this data. Thereby, the displacement member 39 is driven so that the specific region 38A is closed. If this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S77, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharged balls that are discharged after winning at the first grand prize port 36A and the first big prize port 36B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, S78. Move processing to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (short time) is set in the residual sphere monitoring timer than the discharge monitoring timer, but it may be the same or a larger value (long time).

  In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S <b> 79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. Moves the process to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “1” or “2”. The special winning opening opening number counter is a counter used to identify the 1R or 2R that the first big winning opening 36 opens and closes. Therefore, the value of the number-of-opening winning counters is not counted as the number of times the first big winning port 36 and the second big winning port 37A are actually opened, but is incremented by 1 per round. is there. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is neither “1” nor “2”, the process moves to S82, and the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is If it is determined that the value is “1” or “2”, the process proceeds to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, this timer update process routine is ended, and the control state flag indicates the process for opening the special prize opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first grand prize opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter. The first grand prize opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the first big winning opening 36 detected by the first big winning opening count switch 360. The discharged ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharged balls of game balls detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the first grand prize winning prize counter and the value of the discharge ball counter are the same. In this process, the main CPU 61 ends the timer update processing routine when the value of the first grand prize opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, and the value of the first big winning opening winning counter is If it is greater than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. It should be noted that the value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from when the game ball is detected by the first grand prize opening count switch 360 until it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. It corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the first big prize opening prize counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the first big prize due to the ball clogging inside the first big prize opening 36 or the so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning mouth count switch 360 is detected.

  In S83, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the discharge is not normally performed. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the first grand prize winning prize counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update process routine ends. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor that can detect radio waves (not shown), a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S91. If any of the sensors described above is in the detected state, an error notification may be given, and even if, for example, a big prize opening count switch detects a winning of a game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it do.

  In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter of the normal symbol game, the hit determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the normal RAM 63 normal Processing to store in the symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first start opening switch 320, and the second start opening switch 330. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first start opening switch 320 or the second When it is determined that there is an input from the start port switch 330, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding start port winning counter is performed. When this process is finished, this switch input process routine is finished.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 22, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S101.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first big prize opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second big prize opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is finished.

[First start switch check processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 23, in S110, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first start port 32 is detected based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start port. When the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S111, and when the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the first starting opening The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the first start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

  In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first symbol symbols stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S113.

  In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Then, the rendering condition determination random value is extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and are obtained by winning the game ball at the first starting port 32 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S114.

  In S114, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S115.

  In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S <b> 116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and the winning lottery result is determined. It becomes like this. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing the winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed for the effect when it is determined that the winning effect is obtained in the process of S115. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory before the execution of variation is possible. When this process is finished, the first start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Second start-up switch check process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 24, in S120, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not winning of a game ball to the second start port 33 is detected based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second start port When the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S121, and when the bit of the second starting port winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the second starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the second start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. The random number value for effect condition determination is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and the various kinds obtained by winning the game ball at the second starting port 33 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S <b> 126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is finished, the second start port switch check process routine is finished.

[First big prize exit switch check process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first big prize opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 25, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a game ball winning in the first big winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first big winning opening count switch 360. Perform the process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 36 is detected, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S131 and detects the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36. If it is determined not to be performed, the process proceeds to S133.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first grand prize winning prize counter. The first grand prize winning prize counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit number of winnings per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S132.

  In S <b> 132, the main CPU 61 sets the first grand prize winning prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first big prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the secondary control circuit 70, so that the secondary control circuit 70 makes a winning of the game ball to the first big prize opening 36. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout winning balls) displayed during the big hit is added and displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S133.

  In S133, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on a detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S134 and determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. If so, the process proceeds to S142.

  In S134, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passing command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passing command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.
It should be noted that the specific area passing command may not be supplied to the sub CPU 71 when neither the first hit or the second hit in the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state. Also, different types of specific area passing commands are provided corresponding to the small hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state, and the sub CPU 71 can identify which hit state is the passing to the specific area 38A. It is good also as a simple structure.

  In S136, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “1” or “2”. The big prize opening number counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is neither “1” nor “2”, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S142, and the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is If it is determined that the value is “1” or “2”, the process proceeds to S137.

  In S137, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S140, and the value (04H) for the control state flag indicating the process for opening the big prize opening. ), If not, the process proceeds to S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening (05H) or a value indicating the winning end interval management process (06H). I do. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is “05H” or “06H”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S139, and determines that the control state flag is neither “05H” nor “06H”. Moves the process to S142.

  In S139, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than “0”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S140 and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”. In step S142, the process proceeds to step S142. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”, it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may make it do.

  In S140, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”. The specific area passing flag is an internal flag whose value is set to “01H” when a V winning of a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is “01H”, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S142, and determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is not “01H”. , Processing proceeds to S141.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value “01H” of the specific area passing flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probability-changing gaming state is determined after the end of the big hit gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S142, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S143 and determines that the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In that case, the process proceeds to S144.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S144.

  In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first grand prize winning prize counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. In other words, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B without detecting the game ball by the first big prize opening count switch 360. judge. In this process, if the value of the first grand prize opening prize counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the first big prize opening switch check processing routine and the first big prize opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S145.

  In S145, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. If this process ends, the process moves to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the first grand prize winning prize counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process is finished, the first big prize opening switch check processing routine is finished. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S146.

[Second Grand Prize Exit Switch Check Processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second grand prize opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 26, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a game ball winning in the second big winning opening 37A is detected based on the detection signal from the second big winning opening count switch 370. Perform the process. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that a winning of a game ball to the second grand prize opening 37A has been detected, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S151 and detects the winning of a gaming ball to the second big prize opening 37A. If it is determined that it is not, the second big prize opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter. The second grand prize opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.

  In S <b> 152, the main CPU 61 sets the second big prize winning prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second grand prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the secondary control circuit 70, so that the secondary control circuit 70 makes a winning of the game ball to the second big prize opening 37A. Become aware. Thereby, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout winning balls) displayed during the big hit is added and displayed. When this process is finished, the second big prize opening switch check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 27, the numerical values shown from S161 to S168 are control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the control state flag storage area in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S161.

  In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. Details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S162.

  In S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the waiting time after determination has elapsed, the setting of S163 is performed. Details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. In the case of big hit or small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the setting of S164 is performed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S164.

  In S164, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 61 reads the first big prize read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening the mouth shutter 361A and the first big prize mouth shutter 361B and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 18, the main CPU 61 uses the data and the displacement member 39 for opening the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B stored in the main RAM 63. Data for opening is read, and a signal for opening the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B and a signal for opening the displacement member 39 are used as the first big prize opening first shutter solenoid. 3610A, the first big prize opening second shutter solenoid 3610B, and the displacement member solenoid 390 are supplied. As a result, the main CPU 61 performs opening / closing control of the first big prize winning opening 36. In other words, a predetermined advantageous gaming state (a game in which the first grand prize winning opening 36 first changes a predetermined number of times between an open state in which a game ball is easily received and a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball as a period from the start of one round to the interval. A game state is executed in which one round game provided with (state) is repeated a predetermined number of times. In this case, a small hit gaming state in which only the first big winning opening 36 is opened or closed twice or three times may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the first big prize opening 36 is always opened and closed first, but the second big prize opening 37A may be opened and closed first, or the first first prize box 36A is first opened. The special winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37A may be arbitrarily selected and opened / closed.

  Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening time (for example, 7.1 s of the opening / closing pattern D per round) to the big prize opening time. Set to timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S166 may be performed. Details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 61 executes a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed. The grand prize opening number counter is stored and updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 7.1 s of the opening / closing pattern D per round) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S166 may be performed. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for opening / closing the displacement member 39. Details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S166.

  In S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 61 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37A when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value indicating the hit end interval (06H) in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before re-opening of the big winning opening if it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. Details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S167.

  In S167, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. Details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S168.

  In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. Details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flags to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ), (07H) in order, the processing of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 27 is executed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit or small hit. ) In order, the processing of S161, S162, and S163 shown in FIG. 27 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag in the order of (03H), (04H), (05H), so that FIG. The processes of S164, S166, and S165 shown are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 27 is performed by sequentially setting (04H), (06H), (07H). The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of the start memory. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S173.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is “0” for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command stored in this way is supplied as a demonstration display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Thereby, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is “0”. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S174. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not “0”, that is, the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Move processing to.

  In S <b> 174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  In S177, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) to the first special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data in (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  In S178, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) that are jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the high probability jackpot determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with a small number is referred. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability-changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state as a special gaming state that easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big-hit gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition will be higher than the non-probable variable gaming state as a non-special gaming state that is less likely to transition to the specific gaming state than the probability-changing gaming state as the special gaming state.

  Note that the special game state is a probability change / short-time game state and the non-special game state is basically a non-probability change / non-time-short game state, but in this embodiment, the non-special game state includes a non-probability change game state and This includes cases where the game is in short-time gaming.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is used for determining whether or not the special symbol start storage area is extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the jackpot probability due to winning in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be greater or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning in the second starting port 33.

  Thus, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S179, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined that the big win lottery is not won in the big hit determination process of S178. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the gaming state flag.

  Then, the main CPU 61 extracts the special symbol starting storage area random number value extracted in the winning of the game ball and set in the second special symbol starting storage area (0), and the selected small hit determination table. refer. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value.

  In addition, since the small hit can occur only in the second special symbol, the small hit determination processing is performed only based on the random number value for the hit determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area. You may make it perform a small hit determination process based on the random number value for a hit determination memorize | stored in the 1 special symbol starting storage area.

  As described above, in the process of S179, either the small hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is determined when both the big hit determination process of S178 and the small hit determination process of S179 are not won. Loss is determined as a game determination result. If this process ends, the process moves to S180.

  In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a big hit win, and determines the small hit symbol when the small hit determination result is a big hit win, for either the big hit or the small hit. If it is lost, a process of determining a lost symbol is performed. Details of S180 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S181.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines different variation patterns based on the special symbol determined in the process of S180 and the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S178 and S179. Select the variation pattern determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random value extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same in the ST gaming state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S182.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S183.

  In step S183, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variation display. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S191. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S196.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S192 if the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 is the value (02H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S194.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random number value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the random number value for determining the winning symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the jackpot determination table. A process of determining which of “probability change 1”, “probability change 2”, “time reduction 1”, and “time reduction 2”) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 8) based on the random symbol value for determining the winning symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the jackpot determination table. A process for determining which of “probability variation 3” to “probability variation 5” is performed is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S195.

  In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S196, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S179 in FIG. 28) is a win for the small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S197 when the small win is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S201 when it is not the small win.

  In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the small bonus symbol of the second special symbol (the second special symbol small bonus symbol of FIG. 8) based on the random symbol value for winning symbol determination extracted from the big bonus symbol determination counter and the small hit determination table. A process for determining whether the symbol is “small per 1” or “small per 2” shown in the distribution) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S198.

  In S198, the main CPU 61 performs a data set for the small hit symbol of the determined second special symbol and a command set for the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the small special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S199, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S200.

  In S200, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 61 relates to the data related to the number of times of opening of the first prize winning opening 36 and the second prize winning opening 37A, that is, data relating to the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, that is, “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2” according to the first special symbol, Data corresponding to symbols of “time reduction 1”, “time reduction 2”, or “probability variation 3” to “probability variation 5” or “small hit 1” or “small hit 2” according to the second special symbol is set in the main RAM 63. Process. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines in S201 that it is neither big hit in S190 nor small hit in S196, that is, it is a loss, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the lost symbol data of the special symbol. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the manner of disabling display. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value indicates the special symbol variation time management (01H), it moves the process to S211. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S212, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the processing to S213.

  In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. The symbol stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S <b> 214, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S223. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S224.

  In S223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. The time-saving counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol fluctuation frequency) in the time-saving gaming state. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S226. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

  In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation frequency) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227.

  In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S228.

  In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to change the gaming state according to the values of the time reduction number counter and the probability variation number counter and the value of the gaming state flag. More specifically, the main CPU 61 performs the process of S225 and when the value of the time reduction counter becomes “0”, or the process of S225 and the value of the probability variation counter becomes “0”. It is determined that the gaming state is changed. When changing the gaming state, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229. On the other hand, if the game state is not changed, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S231.

  In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a game state flag change process. More specifically, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting values in the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63 in accordance with the values of the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter. When the value of the hour / minute counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 is a non-short game state, when it is “1” or more, the hour / short game state, and when the probability variable number counter is “0”, the non-probability game If the state is “1” or more, it is determined to be a probability variation gaming state, “00H” for a non-probability variation / non-time-short gaming state, “01H” for a non-probability variation / time-short gaming state, a probability variation / non-time-short gaming state “02H” is set in the game state flag, and “03H” is set in the game state flag in the probability change / short time game state.

  In S <b> 230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing etc.) a game state command in the main RAM 63. The gaming state command is a command type (information indicating that it is a gaming state command), information indicating a gaming state (non-probability / non-time reduction, probability change / non-time reduction, non-probability change / time reduction, probability change / time reduction), and the number of probability changes. Is a command including information indicating the remaining number of times (“0” or “40”) and information indicating the remaining number of times (“0” or “40”) as the number of time reductions. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the state of the probability change gaming state and the short time gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S231.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S232. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S236.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S233. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is 15498 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability 1”, and 11496 ms when the other big hit symbol is The hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 11496 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 3”, 996 ms when the probability variation is “4”, and the small hit symbol is “small hit 2”. In this case, it is 3996 ms. The hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3996 ms, which is the same as when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 5” and when the small hit symbol is “small hit 1”.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating a specific hit pattern as well as the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the data indicating the winning pattern included in the winning start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit start interval management process (03H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S243. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S245.

  In S243, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) an upper limit value to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and moves the processing to S244.

  In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter, and moves the process to S245.

  In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big win symbol or the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S245. If this process ends, the process moves to S246.

  In S <b> 246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S247.

  In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S248.

  In S <b> 248, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S249.

  In S249, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the discharge ball counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S250.

  In S <b> 250, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 15.1 s if the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the winning prize opening number counter (for example, the first special symbol big hit symbol is 1R) Is done. If this process ends, the process moves to S251.

In S <b> 251, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37A. The variable stored in this way is to drive the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 3610 or the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 3710 to open the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37A. Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends.
In the present embodiment, in the case of the 1R game in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the first big winning opening 36 is always opened, and therefore data for opening the first big winning opening 36 is set. The Further, here, data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set, but data for opening and closing the specific area 38A may be set in other processing.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

  In S <b> 262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S263.

  In S <b> 263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S264.

  In S 264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S265.

  In S <b> 265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S266.

  In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S267.

  In S <b> 267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S268.

  In S <b> 268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the waiting time question management process routine before reopening the big prize opening is finished.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the special prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big prize opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big prize opening, the process proceeds to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, the main routine for opening the special prize opening is ended.

  In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, it moves the process to S274. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “10” or more, it moves the process to S272.

  In S272, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the type of jackpot and the current round, and moves the process to S273.

  In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the big winning opening opening time is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine for opening the special winning opening.

  In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this manner is for closing the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 3610 or the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 3710. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual sphere monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed big prize opening is the first big prize opening 36. If the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big prize opening is the first big prize opening 36, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S277. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big prize opening is not the first big prize opening 36, that is, the second big prize opening 37A, the process proceeds to S278.

  In S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S278.

  In S278, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S283. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of large winning opening open (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the large winning opening number (rounds), and the value of the large winning opening number counter It is determined whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening. Here, the upper limit value of the number of times the special winning opening is opened is, for example, 16R if “probability variation 1” of the second special symbol. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the process proceeds to S283. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S280.

  In S280, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In addition, although the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b is set as the interval display time between rounds, a time different from these may be set. If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening a big winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S <b> 282, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

On the other hand, in S283, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S284.
In this embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 7500 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”, “time reduction 1”, “ In the case of “short time 2”, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 7500 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability 3”, and 12312 ms when “probability variation 4”. When the big hit symbol is “probability variation 5” and when the small hit symbol is “small hit 1” and “small hit 2”, it is 4500 ms.
As another example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 4500 ms or less for all the big bonus symbols, and the big hit gaming state related to the second special symbol is more final than the first special symbol. The time from the end of the round to the end of the big hit gaming state may be shortened.

  In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S285.

  In S285, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The winning end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S291. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H), the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S301.

  In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, it moves the process to S292. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S301.

  In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passing flag of the main RAM 63 is “01H”. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passing flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S298.

  In S <b> 294, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “03H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “03H” indicates a probability change / short-time game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S295.

  In S <b> 295, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “70” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S296.

  In S <b> 296, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “70” as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S297.

  In S <b> 297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “00H” to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S301.

  In S298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the small hit has ended. If it is determined that the small hit has ended, the process proceeds to S301. If it is determined that the small hit is not finished, the process proceeds to S299.

  In S 299, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “01H” indicates a non-probability change / short time game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S300.

  In S <b> 300, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “30” or “70” as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction number counter in the main RAM 63. More specifically, the main CPU 61 sets “30” as the number of time reductions when the jackpot symbol is “time reduction 1” or “time reduction 2” and does not shift to the probability variation gaming state, and the jackpot symbol is “probability variation 1” to “ If the game does not shift to the probability variation game state with the probability variation 5 ”,“ 70 ”is set as the number of time reductions. If this process ends, the process moves to S301.

  In S301, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command indicates the gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, and information indicating the remaining number of times as a short time (remaining short number of times), and indicates the type of the winning winning gaming state (big hit, small hit) It is a command that contains information. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S310, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S <b> 311, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as a display control process.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In step S <b> 321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S322.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S323. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for display in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) receives various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and rendering image data based on data for displaying the rendering image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S324.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S325.

  In S 325, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling the light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S326.

  In S <b> 326, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is completed, the process moves to S321, and thereafter, the processes of S321 to S326 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 71 is executing the main process, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute a command reception interrupt process or a timer interrupt process. The command reception interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 38 and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S332.

  In step S332, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process is finished, the command reception interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S341.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. If this process ends, the process moves to S342. The timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A is operated. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. If this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for returning the program saved in S340 to each register. When this process is finished, the timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer update process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. The discharge error notification timer is a timer for measuring a time for performing notification of a discharge error. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S354. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S351.

  In S351, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the discharge error notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S352.

  In S <b> 352, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining again whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S353. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, it moves the process to S354.

  In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the discharge error notification flag. The discharge error notification flag is a flag by which the sub CPU 71 can identify whether or not to notify the discharge error. When it is “00H”, the discharge error notification is not performed (ends), and “01H”. In this case, a discharge error is notified. If this process ends, the process moves to S354.

  In S <b> 354, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”. The firing stop notification timer is a timer for measuring the time for performing the firing stop notification (production “STOP” or the like). If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S358. If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S355.

  In S355, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the firing stop notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S356.

  In S356, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining again whether or not the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S358. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”, it moves the process to S357.

  In S357, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the firing stop notification flag. The firing stop notification flag is a flag that allows the sub CPU 71 to identify whether or not to notify the firing stop. When it is “00H”, the firing stop notification is not performed (end), and “01H”. In this case, the firing stop is notified (continued). If this process ends, the process moves to S358.

  In S358, the sub CPU 71 performs other timer update processing. When this process is finished, the timer update process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 41, in S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, it moves the process to S361. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has not been received, the command analysis processing routine ends.

  In step S361, the sub CPU 71 reads the received command data, and performs processing according to the command data in the following steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S362.

  In S362, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S363. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S365.

  In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a decorative symbol variation display mode based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data corresponding to the determined effect pattern in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S364.

  In S364, the sub CPU 71 executes a first effect mode change process. The first effect mode change process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S365, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S366. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S367.

  In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  The decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative symbols (numbers) have a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits)). When the same decoration pattern (numbers) are arranged, the game is basically shifted to the big hit gaming state. Specifically, “probability change 1”, “probability change 2”, “time reduction 1”, “time reduction 2” as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, “probability change 3” to “probability change” as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol With respect to “5” and “small hit 1” and “small hit 2” as small hits, the decorative symbols corresponding to “probable change 1”, “probable change 2”, “short time 1”, “short time 2” The decorative pattern corresponding to any one of “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, or “6”, “probability variation 3”, and “probability variation 4” is the number “3” or “ The decorative pattern corresponding to the “7” assortment, “probability 5”, and “small hit 1” diagrams corresponds to the specific outcome that is the number “-to-” as the combination of the specific symbols, “small hit 2” The decorative design is a combination of a specific design with the number “Toto”, and the decorative design corresponding to the loss is a non-specific design.The stop symbol may not correspond to the specific symbol.

  In S367, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S368. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received a hit start display command as the read command, it moves the process to S369.

  In S368, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. In this winning effect pattern determination process, the winning effect patterns related to all the wins are determined, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S369, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command is received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a specific area passing command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S370. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S371.

  In S370, the sub CPU 71 executes a V winning notification process. In this V winning notification process, effect control based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area is performed, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S371, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S372. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the winning prize opening opening display command as the read command, it moves the process to S373.

  In S372, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the round. In this in-round effect process, a process for executing an effect during a round game is performed, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S373, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that an inter-round display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S374. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that an inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S375.

  In S374, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round effect process. In this inter-round effect process, a process for executing an effect between rounds is performed, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S375, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S376. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S377.

  In S376, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. In the hit end effect process, the effect control at the hit end interval is performed, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S377, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command is received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S378. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S379.

  In S378, the sub CPU 71 executes a second effect mode change process. In the second effect mode change process, effect control according to the content of the received game state command is performed, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S379, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a discharge error command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a discharge error command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S380. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a discharge error command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S381.

  In S380, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. In this discharge error notification process, a process for performing error notification control when a discharge error occurs is described in detail later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S381, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This winning effect pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in S390, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “06H” to the winning effect pattern flag in accordance with the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received winning start display command. “01H” corresponds to the contents of “Probability 1” and “Probability 2”, “02H” corresponds to the contents “Time 1” and “Time 2”, “03H” “Probability 3” Corresponding to the content, “04H” corresponds to the production content of “probability variation 4”, “05H” corresponds to the production content of “probability variation 5” and “small hit 1”, “06H” corresponds to “small hit 2”. It is a value corresponding to the contents of the production. If this process ends, the process moves to S391.

  In S391, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data according to the type of the hit pattern. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data (data corresponding to the value of the hit effect pattern flag) for executing the effect during the hit start interval. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute different effect patterns for each value of the hit effect pattern, but they may be the same.

[V winning notification process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning notification process is a process for notifying the V winning, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in S400, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notifying process routine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S401.

  In S401, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the V winning flag. The V winning flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not a V winning notification has been made. When the V prize is notified, “01H” is set as the value of the V prize flag, and when the V prize is not notified, “00H” is set as the value of the V prize flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S402.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H” or “02H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first special symbol is being hit. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is neither “01H” nor “02H”, the process proceeds to S405. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H” or “02H”, the process proceeds to S403.
Note that when the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” (during a big hit of “time reduction 1” or “time reduction 2”), basically no V prize is given, so the determination of S402 may not be performed. Further, when the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H”, it may be determined to shift to the probability variation mode in S403 described later.

  In step S403, the sub CPU 71 performs a probability change mode transition determination process. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift to the probability changing mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the probability variation mode at 1/10 when “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2”, and when it is “time reduction 1” or “time reduction 2”, the sub CPU 71 determines the probability variation mode at 10/10. It is determined to move to. Note that any probability can be adopted as the probability. For example, “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”, “time reduction 1”, and “time reduction 2” may all be the same probability.

  In S404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift to the probability changing mode. If the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the probability changing mode, it moves the process to S406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines not to shift to the probability changing mode, the V winning notification process routine is terminated.

  In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “03H” to “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is in the second special symbol (except for “small hit 2”). If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “03H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “03H” to “05H”, the V winning notification processing routine is terminated.

In S <b> 406, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is finished, the V winning notification process routine is finished.
In this way, the value “01H” for performing the V winning notification is set to V only when the determination in S404 is positive, or when the second special symbol (excluding “small hit 2”) is given. Set to the winning notification flag. As a result, notification of “V”, for example, an effect image corresponding to the V prize is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, and a predetermined sound is generated using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. And light is emitted. In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports in all hits, and you may comprise so that it may not alert | report. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports only about a part hit.

[Direction processing during round]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the in-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents for each round, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 44, in S410, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S411.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is “2” or less. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is in the round (1R or 2R) in which V winning can be made. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is “2” or less, it moves the process to S412. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the round counter is greater than “2”, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect processing routine during round.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a time and big hit (any one of “time and time 1” and “time and time 2”). If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect processing routine during the round. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern is not “02H”, the process proceeds to S413.
In addition, since it is difficult to win a V prize when it is a short-term hit, it is not necessary to perform a firing stop notification (for example, a notification of “STOP”), so that this firing stop notification is not performed, Although this determination process is provided, this determination process may not be provided.

  In S413, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value as the value of the firing stop notification timer. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to Y seconds (for example, 12 seconds) shorter than X seconds (for example, 12.1 seconds), which is the time from when the displacement member 39 performs the middle opening to the middle opening. . This value also corresponds to the timing just before the big winning opening opens the middle in the probable big hit. In addition, an appropriate value can be adopted within a range that can be notified at a time when V winning is easy. Also, different values may be set according to the hit type. If this process ends, the process moves to S414.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the firing stop notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S415.

  In S415, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data during the round according to the winning effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is finished, the round production process routine is finished.

[Round-to-round production processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an inter-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents between the target rounds, and is executed in units of the following steps. In S420 to S422, the process is executed when the round is ended while the “STOP” effect is being performed.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in S420, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”, it moves the process to S421. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the firing stop notification flag is not “01H”, it moves the process to S423.

  In S <b> 421, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the firing stop notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S422.

In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing stop notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S423.
Note that the present embodiment is not limited to the above configuration. For example, in the case where the V prize cannot be achieved at the 1Rth, the “STOP” effect may be continued between rounds. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and suggest that the player has not won a V prize.

  In S423, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data between rounds according to the winning effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is finished, the inter-round effect process routine is finished.

[Ending effect processing]
46 and 47 are flowcharts showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in S430, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”, it moves the process to S431. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the firing stop notification flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S433.

  In S431, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the firing stop notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S432.

  In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing stop notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S433.

  In S433, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V prize notification flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S434. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S444 in FIG.

  In S434, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H” to “04H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines which one of “probability change 1” to “probability change 4”, “time reduction 1”, and “time reduction 2” is the big hit. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H” to “04H”, the process proceeds to S435. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “01H” to “04H”, the process proceeds to S437.

  In S435, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “04H” to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the probability variation mode. In the present embodiment, the value of the effect mode flag “01H” corresponds to the normal mode, “02H” corresponds to the first short time mode, “03H” corresponds to the second short time mode, and “04H” corresponds to the probability variation mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S436.

  In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “70” to the value of the mode counter. As a result, the probability variation mode is executed with the upper limit of 70 games. Note that the value of the mode counter is a value displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S449 in FIG.

  In S437, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether it is a hit of “probability variation 5” or “small hit 1”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “05H”, the process proceeds to S438. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “05H”, it moves the process to S441.

  In S438, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the direct effect mode of “probability variation 5” or “small hit 1” is the first time reduction mode. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”, it moves the process to S439. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, it moves the process to S449 in FIG.

  In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “03H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode becomes the second time reduction mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S440.

In S440, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “70” to the value of the mode counter. Thus, the second time reduction mode is executed with the upper limit of the number of games being 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S449 in FIG.
In S437 to S440, when the production mode before the hit of “probability change 5” or “small hit 1” is the first time reduction mode, the mode shifts to the second time reduction mode, and the value of the mode counter is set to “70”. It is configured. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the above configuration. For example, you may employ | adopt the structure which sets a predetermined value to the value of a mode counter for every completion | finish of hit regardless of the kind of production mode which is staying.

  In S441, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a V prize is won at “small hit 2”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S442. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S444 in FIG.

  In S442, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the effect mode flag to “02H”. Thereby, the production mode is the first time reduction mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S443.

  In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the mode counter. Thereby, in the first time reduction mode, the number of games is executed up to 30 times. When this process ends, the process moves to S449 in FIG.

  In S444 of FIG. 47, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “06H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not “small hit 2”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “06H”, it moves the process to S445. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “06H”, the process proceeds to S446.

  In S445, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the gaming state determination flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S449.

  In S446, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning is not made during the hit other than “small hit 2” and the normal effect mode is the first short time mode. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”, it moves the process to S449. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, the process proceeds to S447.

  In S447, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “02H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode is the first time reduction mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S448.

  In step S <b> 448, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “30” to the value of the mode counter. Thereby, in the first time reduction mode, the number of games is executed up to 30 times. In the case of the probability variation big hit (big hit of “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 5”), “70” may be set to the value of the mode counter, or a different value may be set. If this process ends, the process moves to S449.

  In S449, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S450.

  In S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S451.

  In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S452.

  In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S453.

  In S453, the sub CPU 71 sets the winning end effect data corresponding to the winning effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the end hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[First effect mode change process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the first effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. The first effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a time reduction counter update process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the time reduction counter included in the received variation pattern designation command to the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S461.

  In S461, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is “01H”, it moves the process to S462. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S465.

  In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S463.

  In S463, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode becomes the normal mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S464.

  In S464, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the normal mode forced transition flag. When this process is finished, the first effect mode change process routine is finished.

  In S465, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode transition suspension flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode transition suspension flag is “01H”, it moves the process to S466. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode transition suspension flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S474.

  In S466, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect mode promotion determination process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to promote the effect mode based on the current effect mode. Below, the detail of a process is demonstrated for every production mode.

(In the case of the first time reduction mode)
When the main game state is the probability variation game state, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the second time reduction mode with a probability of “5/10”, and the first time reduction mode with a probability of “5/10”. Is determined to be maintained. The sub CPU 71 determines that it is in the probability variation gaming state when the remaining probability variation number included in the received variation pattern designation command is 1 or more, and on the other hand, when the remaining probability variation number is 0. It is determined that the game state is inaccurate.
In addition, when the main game state is the non-probability change game state, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the second time reduction mode with a probability of “2/10”, and with the probability of “8/10” It is determined that the 1 hour short mode is maintained.
In this embodiment, the probability is indicated as “x / y”, but the probability is realized by performing a predetermined random number lottery.

The effect mode promotion determination process in the first short time mode is not limited to the above-described process. For example, the probabilities such as the mode promotion probability may be further defined as follows based on the remaining probability variation count and / or the remaining short time count on the main side. The mode promotion probability is the probability of promotion from the first time reduction mode to the second time reduction mode in the case of the first time reduction mode, and the probability of promotion from the second time reduction mode to the probability variation mode in the case of the second time reduction mode. Means.
(Example 1)
If the remaining probability variation number is 31 or more, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift (promote) to the second time reduction mode with a probability of “5/10” (maintain with a probability of “5/10”). When the remaining probability variation number is 1 or more and 30 or less, it is determined to shift to the second time reduction mode with a probability of “2/10” (maintained with a probability of “8/10”).
(Example 2)
If the remaining short time count is 31 times or more, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the second short time mode with a probability of “5/10” (maintained with a probability of “5/10”), and the remaining short time count. Is 1 or more and 30 or less, it is determined to shift to the second time reduction mode with a probability of “2/10” (maintained with a probability of “8/10”).
(Example 3)
When the total of the remaining probability variation count and the remaining short time count is 101 times or more, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the second short time mode with a probability of “8/10” (probability of “2/10”). In the case where the total of the number of remaining probability changes and the remaining short time count is 51 times or more and 100 times or less, it is determined to shift to the second short time mode with a probability of “5/10” (“5/10 ), And when the total of the remaining probability variation count and the remaining short time count is 1 or more and 50 or less, it is determined to shift to the second short time mode with a probability of “2/10” (“ 8/10 ”probability).

(In the case of 2nd time reduction mode)
When the main game state is the probability variation game state, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the probability variation mode with a probability of “2/10” and maintains the second time reduction mode with a probability of “8/10”. Judge that.
Further, when the main game state is the non-probability changing game state, the sub CPU 71 determines to maintain the second time reduction mode with a probability of “10/10”.
The effect mode promotion determination process in the second short time mode is not limited to the above-described process. For example, the mode promotion probability may further be defined as in the above (Example 1) or (Example 2) based on the main side remaining probability change count and / or the remaining short time count. In this case, “second time reduction mode” shown in each of (Example 1) and (Example 2) is replaced with “probability change mode”.

(In the probability variation mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines to maintain the probability variation mode with a probability of “10/10”.
The mode promotion probability is not limited to the above-described value, and an appropriate value can be adopted.
When the process of S466 is completed, the process proceeds to S467. The effect mode promotion determination process may be performed at different timings to promote the effect mode.

  In S467, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is determined to promote the effect mode in the process of S466. If the sub CPU 71 determines to promote, the process proceeds to S468. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines not to promote, the process proceeds to S470.

  In S468, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “03H” or “04H” to the value of the effect mode flag. More specifically, when the current performance mode is the first time reduction mode, the sub CPU 71 sets “03H” corresponding to the transition destination second time reduction mode to the value of the performance mode flag, and If the mode is the second time reduction mode, “04H” corresponding to the probability change mode of the transition destination is set as the value of the effect mode flag. In addition, it is good also as a structure which transfers production | presentation mode from 1st time reduction mode to probability variation mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S469.

  In S469, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the time reduction counter to the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S472. Note that the value of the probability variation counter may be set as the value of the mode counter. In other words, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions and the number of times of probability variation may be different values, so counting is based on the number of time reductions, but when the number of time reductions and the number of times of probability variation are the same, By simply setting a value corresponding to the number of times of probability variation, the number of time reductions can be managed.

  In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs addition number determination processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S471. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating a value obtained by adding the selection value to the number of times on the main side. The selection values are “± 0” with a probability of “1/10”, “−10” with a probability of “3/10”, “−20” with a probability of “3/10”, and a probability of “3/10”. It is “−30”. If the value set to the mode number counter becomes negative due to the calculation, the value of the time count on the main side may be set as it is, or a predetermined value (“ 10 "etc.) may be set. If this process ends, the process moves to S471.

  In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the determined (calculated) value to the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S472.

  In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to whether to promote or continue. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for notifying “not yet”, “+ X (value of mode number counter)”, and the like. In this embodiment, the same effect data is set at the time of promotion and at the time of maintenance. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and different effect data is set so that the promotion or maintenance can be clearly seen. It may be. If this process ends, the process moves to S473.

  In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the mode transition suspension flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S474.

  In S474, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode number counter is “0”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode is the normal mode. When determining that the value of the mode number counter is “0”, the sub CPU 71 ends the first effect mode change processing routine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode number counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S475.

  In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S476.

  In S476, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode number counter is “0”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode number counter is “0”, it moves the process to S477. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the mode number counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 71 ends the first effect mode change processing routine.

  In S477, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “2” or more. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hour / counter counter is “2” or more, it moves the process to S478. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “2” or more, it moves the process to S479. In addition, when the value of the hour / short counter is “1”, the hour / short gaming state is ended by the special symbol variation, so that it is determined whether or not the next special symbol variation is also the hour / short gaming state. The determination process is performed.

  In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the mode transition suspension flag. By this process, the process (S465 to S473, etc.) related to the maintenance or promotion of the effect mode is performed in the next change. If this process ends, the process moves to S480.

  In S479, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the normal mode forced transition flag. With this process, the process related to the transition to the normal mode (S461 to S464, etc.) is performed in the next change. If this process ends, the process moves to S480.

  In S480, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data indicating the end of the effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect based on the effect data is executed at the end of the special symbol variation, but is not limited to this configuration, and the effect is performed at different timings such as an early stage of the variation. It is good. When this process is finished, the first effect mode change process routine is finished.

[Second effect mode change process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the second effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This second effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in S490, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the gaming state determination flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V prize is won at “small hit 2”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the gaming state determination flag is “01H”, it moves the process to S491. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the gaming state determination flag is not “01H”, it moves the process to S495.

  In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received gaming state command is a command indicating a probability variation gaming state and a short-time gaming state. If it is determined that the game state command is a command indicating a probability change / short time game state, the process proceeds to S492. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is not a command indicating a probability change / short time gaming state, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S493.

  In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “04H” to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the probability variation mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S494.

  In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “02H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode is the first time reduction mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S494.

  In S494, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the time reduction count of the received gaming state command to the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the mode count counter. When this process is finished, the second effect mode changing process routine is finished.

  In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a short-time game state. If it is determined that the gaming state command is a command indicating a short-time gaming state, the second effect mode change processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is not a command indicating the short-time gaming state, the process proceeds to S496.

  In step S496, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the mode number counter to “0”. If this process ends, the process moves to S497.

  In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S498.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. When this process is finished, the second effect mode changing process routine is finished.
Note that the present embodiment is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, when the value of the mode number counter is “0”, the value of the hour / hour counter is “0”, and the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”, the processing of S495 to S498 may be omitted.

[Discharge error notification processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a discharge error notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This discharge error notification process is a process for notifying a discharge error, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge error notification timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. Other seconds may be used, or a discharge error may be notified until the power is turned off without applying the discharge error notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S501.

  In S <b> 501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification flag is “00H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the discharge error notification flag is “00H”, it moves the process to S502. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the discharge error notification flag is not “00H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the discharge error notification processing routine.

  In S <b> 502, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “01H” to the discharge error notification flag. As a result, a discharge error is notified. When this process ends, the discharge error notification process routine ends.

  51 to 53 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect screen and the effect screen flow. In the following, the case where the production mode is shifted to the normal mode, the first time reduction mode, the second time reduction mode, the first time reduction mode, the probability variation mode, and the first time reduction mode will be described as an example. Will be described. For convenience of explanation, the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the probability variation counter updated by the main CPU 61 are shown.

SC1 to SC59 are effect contents displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. On the screen, a decorative symbol display unit for displaying decorative symbols (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol), player A mode display unit that can identify the production mode, a time display unit that allows the player to recognize the number of time reductions, an instruction display unit that displays instructions related to the launch of the game ball, etc. are displayed as appropriate Is changed.
SC1 shows a mode in which the decorative symbols are changed in the normal mode. In this example, since the lottery of the first special symbol was won, the decorative symbols were sequentially stopped (SC2, SC3), and the fact that the big hit was displayed on the screen (SC4), the big bonus of the first special symbol (SC5 to SC7). In the effect related to the jackpot, in order to support (prompt) the V prize winning by the player, the instruction display unit notifies the firing timing of the game ball (an example of notification for instructing not to perform the firing, “STOP”). An example of notification instructing to perform “right-handed” or the like).
Then, after the big hit is over, it is notified that the production mode has been shifted to the first time reduction mode (SC8). In this example, V is won during the big hit, so 70 times is set internally for the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the probability variation counter, but 30 times are displayed on the screen (SC9). . At this point, the player cannot grasp whether or not he has won a V prize.
Thereafter, the game progresses, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction number display section becomes 0 (SC9 to SC14), and it is notified that the first time reduction mode has ended (SC15). However, internally, since the value of the time reduction counter is “41”, an effect is provided to notify that the first time reduction mode continues (SC16).

In addition, since the game has progressed and in this example, the big win of “probability change 5” has been won, the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed as “6 wins 6” (SC19), and subsequently the “winning” notification is performed (SC20). Here, not only “probability variation 5” but also “small hit 1” can be a stop mode of “6 to 6”. Since it cannot be determined, the player cannot recognize the winning type from this effect.
Subsequently, notification (“STOP”, “Right-handed”, etc.) regarding the timing of game ball firing is performed on the instruction display unit (SC21, SC22). In this example, the player wins the game ball in the specific area 38. Therefore, “V” indicating that the game ball has won in the specific area 38 is displayed on the screen (SC22). Since this “V” display is displayed as either “probability variation 5” or “small hit 1”, the player cannot grasp the type of winning even by this effect.
After the big hit, the fact that the production mode has shifted to the second time reduction mode is notified (SC23).

  In addition, since the game has progressed and in this example, the jackpot of “probability 5” has been won, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as “5 wins 5” (SC25), and a notification (““ STOP "," Right-handed ", etc.) are performed (SC26, SC27). In this example, the player has won a game ball in the specific area 38, so" V "is displayed on the screen (SC27). After the end of the big hit, it is notified that the production mode has continued to the second time reduction mode (SC28). In the present embodiment, since winning V in “probability variation 5”, 70 times are internally set as the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the probability variation counter. On the other hand, on the screen, when the same production mode continues, the number of times is taken over and 60 times are displayed (SC29).

In addition, since the game has progressed, and in this example, the winning combination of “small hit 1” is won, the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed as “4 wins 4” (SC30). At this time, since the game ball has not won in the specific area 38, it is notified that the effect mode has shifted from the second short time mode to the first short time mode (SC31, SC32). In the present embodiment, since “small hit 1”, internally, the value of the time reduction number counter and the value of the probability variation number counter are the number of times before the small hit (11 times in this example).
In addition, since the game has progressed (SCSC33 to SC38), and in this example, the winning symbol is won around “small win 2”, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as “winning” (SC39), and it is won around “small bonus 2”. A message to the effect is sent (SC40). In the present embodiment, in the case of “small hit 2”, an effect relating to a method for identifying whether or not the game state is a probability variation gaming state is performed. In this example, an effect of “If you do not win V, you can determine the gaming state!” Is displayed on the screen (SC41). In other words, the player cannot discriminate whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state from the previous performance, but by performing the game according to the current rendering, it can be identified whether or not the game state is the probability variation gaming state. become.
In this example, since the game ball has not won in the specific area 38, an effect of “probability change mode entry” is displayed on the screen (SC42). From the standpoint of the player, it becomes possible to grasp that the game is in a probable game state with this effect as a trigger.
In addition, in this example, a screen flow is shown when the game wins the big win of “Probability Change 4” and then wins the jackpot of “Probability Change 5” (SC43 to SC59).

FIG. 54 is a diagram (modification example) showing a special winning opening opening / closing pattern and an interval time between rounds. 12 differs from the content shown in FIG. 12 mainly in that a winning pattern is defined so that the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37A are alternately opened and closed.
More specifically, for example, in the “hit pattern 1”, the first grand prize winning opening 36 is opened and closed in the form of the opening / closing pattern A in the second round, and the second big prize winning opening 37A is opened and closed in the third round. Opening and closing is performed in the form of pattern I, and in the 4Rth, the first big prize opening 36 is opened and closed in the form of opening and closing pattern A, and in the 5Rth, the second big prize opening 37A is opened and closed in the form of opening and closing pattern I. Is done.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 56, another aspect (modification) of the winning device mechanism will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the first mode of the winning device mechanism includes a first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, a first big prize opening second count switch 360B, a first big prize opening shutter 361A, This is realized by including a single grand prize opening shutter 361B, a rolling region 372, a specific region 38A, a non-specific region 38B, discharge ports 38X and 38Y, and a displacement member 39.

In a state where the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are closed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A is the upper stage, the rolling region 372 is the middle stage, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B is the lower stage. Thus, each component is stepped. Therefore, in a state where each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B.
5 is different from the winning device mechanism shown in FIG. 5 in the presence / absence of the second large winning opening shutter 371A and the other configurations are the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the second mode of the winning device mechanism is the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, the first big prize opening second count switch 360B, the first big prize opening third count switch. 360C, first big prize opening shutter 361A, first big prize opening shutter 361B, first big prize opening shutter 361C, second big prize opening shutter 371A, rolling area 372, rolling area 373, specific area 38A, non-specification The region 38B, the discharge ports 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39 are included.
The first grand prize port shutter 361A, the first grand prize port shutter 361B, and the first grand prize port shutter 361C are simultaneously controlled to be opened and closed, and the first grand prize port 36A, the first grand prize port 36B, and The first big winning opening 36C is simultaneously opened and closed.

In the present winning device mechanism, a first grand prize opening shutter 361A is provided at the upper right, and a first major winning opening first count switch is provided below the first big prize opening shutter 361A (directly below in this example). 360A is provided.
On the other hand, a rolling area 372 is provided on the lower left side of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, and a first big prize opening shutter 361B is provided on the lower left side of the rolling area 372. A first grand prize port second count switch 360B is provided below the first big prize port shutter 361B (directly below in this example).
Further, a rolling area 373 is provided at the lower left of the first big prize opening shutter 361B, and a first big prize opening shutter 361C is provided at the lower left of the rolling area 373. A first grand prize port third count switch 360C, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and a discharge port 38X are sequentially provided below the first grand prize port shutter 361C (directly below in this example). .
Further, in the prize winning device mechanism, a non-specific region 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the bottom.
Next, looking at the positional relationship through which the game balls can pass at each of the winning prize openings, the position where the first winning prize opening first count switch 360A (the first winning prize opening 36A) can pass, The position is set lower in the order of the position through which the two-count switch 360B (first big prize opening 36B) can pass and the position through which the first big prize port third count switch 360C (first big prize opening 36C) can pass.

  In a state in which the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the first big prize opening shutter 361B, and the first big prize opening shutter 361C are closed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A is the first stage, and the rolling area 372 is the second stage. Each component has a staircase shape such that the first grand prize opening shutter 361B is in the third stage, the rolling region 373 is in the fourth stage, and the first big prize opening shutter 361C is in the fifth stage. Therefore, in the state where each shutter is closed, the game ball rolls in the order of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, the first big prize opening shutter 361B, the rolling area 373, and the first big winning opening shutter 361C. It is possible to move. Note that the game ball that has passed over the first grand prize opening shutter 361C passes through the second big prize opening 37A when the second big prize opening shutter 371A is open, and is guided to the back side of the present prize winning mechanism. .

Next, when a game ball reaches each of the first grand prize port shutter 361A, the first big prize port shutter 361B, and the first big prize port shutter 361C, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is open Will be described.
Here, each of the shutters (first big prize opening shutter 361A to first big prize opening shutter 361C and second big prize opening shutter 371A) performs an opening / closing operation (drive) according to the pattern shown in FIG. Is called. At this time, the first big prize opening shutter 361A to the first big prize opening shutter 361C perform opening and closing operations (drives) simultaneously when opening and closing the first big prize winning opening 36A to the first big prize winning opening 36C, and the second large winning prize opening shutter 361C. The winning opening shutter 371A opens and closes when opening and closing the second large winning opening 37A.
(In the state where the first grand prize opening shutter 361A is opened)
After the game ball has passed through the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, the game ball will pass through the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided below. The game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A does not pass through the specific area 38A.
(The state where the first big prize opening shutter 361B is opened)
The game ball passes through the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided below after passing through the first big winning opening second count switch 360B. Note that the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening second count switch 360B does not pass through the specific area 38A.
(A state where the first grand prize opening shutter 361C is opened)
The game ball passes through the first grand prize port third count switch 360C (first grand prize port 36C) and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific region 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball passes through the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided below without passing through the specific region 38A.
The winning device mechanism is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, four or more shutters for the first grand prize opening may be provided instead of three. In addition, for example, the shutter for the second grand prize opening may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the third mode of the winning device mechanism is realized including the same components as the second mode.

In the present winning device mechanism, a first grand prize opening shutter 361A is provided at the upper right, and a first major winning opening first count switch is provided below the first big prize opening shutter 361A (directly below in this example). 360A is provided.
On the other hand, a rolling area 372 is provided on the lower left side of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, and a first big prize opening shutter 361B is provided on the lower left side of the rolling area 372. A first grand prize port second count switch 360B is provided below the first big prize port shutter 361B (directly below in this example).
Further, a rolling area 373 is provided at the lower left of the first big prize opening shutter 361B, and a first big prize opening shutter 361C is provided at the lower left of the rolling area 373. A first grand prize port third count switch 360C is provided below the first grand prize port shutter 361C (directly below in this example).
Further, in the prize winning device mechanism, the displacement member 39, the specific region 38A, and the discharge port 38X are sequentially provided on the left side at the bottom, and the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided on the right side. It has been.

Next, when a game ball reaches each of the first grand prize port shutter 361A, the first big prize port shutter 361B, and the first big prize port shutter 361C, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is open Since both are the same, the state where the first big prize opening shutter 361A is opened will be described as an example. Since the opening / closing operation (driving) of each shutter (the first big prize opening shutter 361A to the first big prize opening shutter 361C and the second big prize opening shutter 371A) is the same as FIG. 55 (b), Description is omitted.
The game ball can reach the displacement member 39 after passing through the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A. When the displacement member 39 is opened when the displacement member 39 is reached, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, if the displacement member 39 is not reached, or if the displacement member 39 is closed even if the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball does not pass through the specific region 38A, and the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y. Will pass.
Here, in a state where the specific area 38A is open (the displacement member 39 is open), the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 38A (easiness to pass) is the first big prize opening first count. The switch 360A, the first big winning opening second count switch 360B, and the first big winning opening third count switch 360C are configured in this order. On the other hand, in a state where the specific area 38A is open, the possibility that the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B is as follows. First big winning opening first count switch 360A, first big winning opening second count switch 360B, The first grand prize winning opening third count switch 360C is configured to decrease in order.
The winning device mechanism is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, four or more shutters for the first grand prize opening may be provided instead of three. In addition, for example, the shutter for the second grand prize opening may not be provided.

56 (a) to 56 (c) show a fourth mode of the winning device mechanism. FIG. 56A is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the second grand prize port shutter 371A and the second big prize port shutter 371B are closed (when closed), and FIG. 56B is a second grand prize port. It is a front view of a prize winning device mechanism in a state where the shutter 371A and the second big prize opening shutter 371B are opened (when opened), and (c) shows that there is one second big prize opening 37A. It is a front view of the winning device mechanism when the partition plate 371X is removed. As shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the partition plate 371X is provided in front of the second major winning opening 37, and the internal space is in communication.
As shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the fourth mode of the winning device mechanism is the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, the first big prize opening second count switch 360B, the first big prize opening. Third count switch 360C, first big prize opening shutter 361A, first big prize opening shutter 361B, first big prize opening shutter 361C, second big prize opening shutter 371A, second big prize opening shutter 371B, partition plate 371X, This is realized including the rolling region 372, the rolling region 373, the specific region 38 </ b> A, the non-specific region 38 </ b> B, the discharge ports 38 </ b> X and 38 </ b> Y, and the displacement member 39.
As described above, since the second grand prize opening 37 communicates with the inside, even if only one second big prize opening count switch (not shown) is provided, the second big prize opening 37 is awarded. Can be detected. However, a second grand prize port count switch (not shown) is provided corresponding to each of the second grand prize port shutter 371A and the second grand prize port shutter 371B, and the game ball corresponds to any shutter. It can also be set as the structure which can identify whether it was awarded to the winning opening 37 (2nd large winning opening 37A, 2nd large winning opening 37B).

The arrangement of the components in the prize winning device mechanism is the same as that of the second mode shown in FIG. 55 (b) except for the second big prize opening shutter 371A and the second big prize opening shutter 371B, and the description thereof is omitted. To do. In addition, when the game balls reach each of the first grand prize port shutter 361A, the first big prize port shutter 361B, and the first big prize port shutter 361C, the flow of the game balls when the shutters are opened. Since it is the same as that of the 2nd mode, the explanation is omitted. In addition, when each shutter is opened when the game ball reaches each of the second grand prize opening shutter 371A and the second big prize opening shutter 371B, the game ball corresponds to the second grand prize winning corresponding to each shutter. It passes through the mouth 37A or the second grand prize winning port 37B, is guided to the back side of the present winning device mechanism, and does not pass through the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B.
FIG. 12 or FIG. 54 shows the shutters (the first grand prize opening shutter 361A to the first big prize opening shutter 361C, the second big prize opening shutter 371A, and the second big prize opening shutter 371B) of the present prize winning device mechanism. An opening / closing operation (drive) is performed according to the pattern. At this time, the first big prize opening shutter 361A to the first big prize opening shutter 361C perform opening and closing operations (drives) simultaneously when opening and closing the first big prize winning opening 36A to the first big prize winning opening 36C, and the second largest The prize opening shutter 371A and the second big prize opening shutter 371B perform opening and closing operations simultaneously when opening and closing the second big prize opening 37A and the second big prize opening 37B.

Next, looking at the positional relationship through which the game balls can pass at each of the grand prize winning holes, the position where the first grand prize winning opening first count switch 360A (the first grand prize winning port 36A) can pass and the second big winning prize number Position that can pass through 1 count switch 370A (first big prize opening 37A), position that can pass through first big prize opening second count switch 360B (first big prize opening 36B), and second big prize opening second count The positions are set lower in order of the position through which the switch 370B (first big prize opening 37B) can pass and the position through which the first big prize opening third count switch 360C (first big prize opening 36C) can pass.
In other words, the position (area) where the game ball can pass through the first big winning opening 36A realizes the first passing area, and the position where the game ball can pass through the first big winning opening 36B realizes the second passing area. The position that can pass through the second big prize opening 37A realizes the third passing area, and the position that can pass through the second big prize opening 37B realizes the fourth passing area and passes through the first big prize opening 36C. Possible positions realize the fifth passage region. The first big prize opening shutter 361A realizes a first displacement member, the first big prize opening shutter 361B realizes a second displacement member, the second big prize opening shutter 371A realizes a third displacement member, The second big prize opening shutter 371B realizes a fourth displacement member, and the first big prize opening shutter 361C realizes a fifth displacement member.
Further, the present embodiment is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, in one round game, a plurality of shutters are configured to move in order to open and close a plurality of passage areas. However, a single shutter may be configured to open and close a plurality of passage areas. Good.

<Effects obtained by the configuration described above>
According to the above-described configuration, for example, the “short time 1” big hit game state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A and the “probability 2” big hit game in which the game ball can easily pass to the specific area 38A. The state of the open state of the second variable winning device in one or more rounds (for example, 1R) of these jackpot gaming states can be both the first time (for example, 5.1 s) (see FIG. 8-12, FIG. 14, etc.). In this way, in the “short time 1” big hit game state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, it is not disadvantageous compared to the “probability 2” big hit game state in which the game ball can easily pass to the specific area 38A. By providing a point, it is possible to eliminate a situation where the degree of advantage is remarkably reduced, so that the interest can be improved.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, a “short time 2” big hit game state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A and a “probability change 1” big hit game in which the game ball can easily pass to the specific area 38A. A state is provided. The open time of the second variable prize-winning device in one or a plurality of rounds (for example, the 1R round) of the “short time 2” jackpot game state is the first time (7.1 s), and the jackpot game of “probability change 1” The time of the open state of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus in a state is the 3rd time (3.1s) shorter than 1st time (FIGS. 8-13 etc.). In this way, in the “short time 2” big hit game state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, it becomes more advantageous than the “probability 1” big hit game state in which the game ball can easily pass to the specific area 38A. By providing a point, it is possible to eliminate a situation where the degree of advantage is remarkably reduced, so that the interest can be improved.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A in the “small hit 2” small hit game state, a notification (for example, “V winning must be won” The game state can be determined! ”(FIG. 53, etc.). Therefore, the player can grasp whether or not the game state is in the probability variation game state by not allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A in the “small hit 2” small hit game state.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, when the gaming ball does not pass through the specific area 38A in the “small hit 1” small hit gaming state, the notification is performed both when the probability changing gaming state is controlled and when it is not controlled. (For example, “V” effect) is performed (FIG. 52, etc.) According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the player is in the probability variation gaming state.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the probability variation mode ends when the probability variation gaming state ends. However, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A during the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 5”, the certain number of times again (for example, 70 times). ) Is possible (FIG. 16 etc.). Therefore, if the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A in the big hit game state of “probability change 5” is repeated, the probability change game state does not end, so the probability change mode does not end.
On the other hand, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 38A during the small hit game state of “one small hit”, the probability variation game state of the predetermined number of times is not possible again. Therefore, if the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A in the small hit game state of “one small hit” is repeated, the probability change game state is eventually ended and the probability change mode is ended.
However, in the big hit gaming state of “probability change 5” and the small hit game state of “small hit 1”, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the probability change mode continues, so which game state is apparently displayed. I don't know if
Therefore, even if it can recognize that it is the first production mode by confirming the production, the probability variation mode suddenly ends or the probability variation mode continues for a period far exceeding the expectation. The probability variation gaming state ends abruptly or continues for a period far exceeding expectations, making it difficult to recognize how long the probability variation gaming state will continue. Improvements can be made.
In addition, in the small hit gaming state of “one small hit”, the probability variation gaming state does not end because the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but in the small hit gaming state of “one small hit” In addition, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, the probability variation mode ends as in the end of the probability variation gaming state. This makes it even more difficult to recognize from the effect mode that the game state is probabilistic.

  In the configuration described above, for example, in the big hit gaming state of “probability change 5” and the small hit game state of “small hit 1”, notifications (“probability change 5” and “ The "V" effect performed when winning a V in any of the "1 per small prize" is the same, and the second variable winning device (for example, the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the first big prize opening shutter). 361B) have the same or substantially the same displacement mode (FIGS. 8 to 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 52, etc.). In this way, it becomes more difficult to recognize how long the probability variation gaming state will continue by making the recognition of the big hit gaming state of “probability change 5” and the small hitting gaming state of “small hit 1” even more difficult. Further, it is possible to improve the interest in the probabilistic gaming state.

  In the configuration described above, for example, in the small hit gaming state of “one small hit”, the probability variation gaming state does not end because the gaming ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but the gaming ball does not end in the specific area 38A. Is not passed, it is notified that the mode is the first time reduction mode both after the end of the big hit gaming state of “probability change 5” and after the end of the small hit gaming state of “small hit 1” (for example, “first time reduction” Since the “mode entry” effect is performed), it can be seen as if the probable gaming state has ended (FIGS. 16, 52, etc.).

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the small hit game state of “small hit 2”, the game ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 38A to notify whether or not the game state is a probable change game state. Notification is possible (FIG. 16, FIG. 53, etc.).

  According to the configuration described above, for example, in the big hit gaming state, after the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are controlled to the first position, the second big prize opening shutter 371A is set to the first position. After that, it is possible to control the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B to the first position (FIG. 54, etc.). Further, the game ball passes through a position where it can pass through the second grand prize port 37A after passing through a position where it can pass through the first grand prize port 36A, and then passes through a position where it can pass through the first grand prize port 36B. Is possible. According to such a configuration, when the first big prize opening shutter 361A is in the first position, the game balls that have not passed through the first big prize opening 36A are not taken out by the second big prize opening 37A. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have not passed through the second grand prize opening 37A from being missed by the first grand prize opening 36B when the second big prize port shutter 371A is in the first position. it can. In this way, in the big hit gaming state, it is possible to reduce a situation in which a disadvantage to the player such as missing a game ball occurs, so that the interest can be improved.

  “Taking out” means that, in the big hit gaming state, a game ball that is launched aiming for a prize at a prize winning opening does not win any of the prize winning entries.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, a “short time 2” big hit game state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A and a “probability change 1” big hit game in which the game ball can easily pass to the specific area 38A. In the jackpot gaming state of “Time reduction 2”, the time that can pass through the passing area is the first time (for example, 7.1 s), and in the jackpot gaming state of “Probability 1”, it can pass through the passing area. The time becomes a third time (for example, 3.1 s) that is equal to or less than the first time (FIGS. 8 to 13, etc.). In this way, in the “short time 2” big hit game state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, it is possible to pass through the pass area more easily than the second big hit game state in which the game ball can easily pass to the specific area 38A. It is possible to further enhance the interest by providing a configuration in which the time is not shortened and a point that does not become disadvantageous in the jackpot gaming state of “Time 2” is less disadvantageous than the jackpot gaming state of “Probability change 1”.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit gaming state, the control for setting the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the first big prize opening shutter 361B, and the first big prize opening shutter 361C to the first position; It is possible to alternately control the winning opening shutter 371A and the second large winning opening shutter 371B to the first position (FIG. 56, etc.). In this way, in the big hit gaming state, by preventing the game balls that have not passed through the big winning opening from being missed when the shutters of each other are in the first position, it is possible for the player to miss the game ball. Since the situation where profits are generated can be further reduced, the interest can be further improved.

  According to the configuration described above, for example, in the big hit gaming state, the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B, the second big prize opening shutter 371A and the second big prize opening shutter 371B are alternately opened and closed. (FIG. 56 etc.). Further, for example, in the big hit gaming state, the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the first big prize opening shutter 361B, the first big prize opening shutter 361C, the second big prize opening shutter 371A, and the second big prize opening shutter 371B, Can open and close alternately. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has not passed through the passing area from being missed when the shutters are at the first position, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the big hit gaming state. Can do.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the same or similar components as those shown in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

[Winning device mechanism]
The winning device mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 57A is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state in which the first grand prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are closed (when closed), and FIG. 57B is the first grand prize opening. It is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are opened (when opened).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the present prize winning mechanism includes a first big prize opening first count switch 360A, a first big prize opening second count switch 360B, a first big prize opening shutter 361A, a first big prize winning. This is realized including the mouth shutter 361B, the rolling region 372, the specific region 38A, the non-specific region 38B, the discharge ports 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39. In this pachinko gaming machine, the game ball fired by “right-handed” basically flows down the right side of the stage 31, reaches the first big prize opening shutter 361A, and the first big prize opening shutter 361A. When the first big prize opening shutter 361B is closed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are sequentially rolled. Further, in this embodiment, if “right-handed” is performed when the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are opened, the first big prize opening second count switch 360B detects it. Without being detected by the first big prize opening first count switch 360A. For this reason, the game ball is configured not to pass through the specific area 38A even if “right-handed” is performed when the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are open.

In the present prize winning mechanism, a first big prize opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36A is provided in the upper right corner. A first big prize opening first count switch 360A is provided below the first big prize opening shutter 361A (just below in this example).
A rolling area 372 is provided at the lower left of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, and a first big prize opening shutter 361B is provided at the lower left of the rolling area 372. A first grand prize port second count switch 360B, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and a discharge port 38X are sequentially provided below the first grand prize port shutter 361B (just below in this example). .
In the prize winning device mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the bottom.

  In a state where the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B are closed, the first big prize opening shutter 361A is the upper stage, the rolling area 372 is the middle stage, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B is the lower stage. Thus, each component is stepped. Therefore, in a state where each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first big prize opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first big prize opening shutter 361B.

  Next, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is opened when the game ball reaches each of the first grand prize port shutter 361A and the first big prize port shutter 361B will be described.

(In the state where the first grand prize opening shutter 361A is opened)
As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the game ball passes through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A and then passes through the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided further below. Become. The game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A does not pass through the specific area 38A.

(The state where the first big prize opening shutter 361B is opened)
The game ball passes through the first big prize opening second count switch 360 </ b> B and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific region 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball passes through the non-specific region 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided below without passing through the specific region 38A.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
Next, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58, in this embodiment, the hit probability (big hit probability) of a special symbol including a small hit probability described later is 1/80 (25/2000) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state). ) When the probability is high (probability game state), it is 1 / 76.9 (26/2000). The probability of hitting a small hit gaming state is 0 for the first special symbol and 1/100 (20/2000) for the second special symbol. In addition, the probability at the time of the low probability and the high probability in the big hit probability is not limited to the above-described one. It is possible to appropriately adopt a probability that a high probability is easier to win than a low probability. In addition, the small hit may not be won.
The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. The digestion order may be a winning order, or the first special symbol may be preferential digestion.
As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 30 times as the number of games (special symbol variation number) is implemented. Note that the number of STs is not limited to that described above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol "probability variation 1", the winning opening opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is "winning pattern 1", 5R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is "probability major bonus." 1 ”. The probability (selection rate) of “probability variation 1” as a big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 2”, the winning pattern is “hit pattern 1” and the bonus content is “probability variation big hit 2”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probability 2” of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 3”, the winning pattern is “hit pattern 1”, and the bonus content is “probability variation big hit 3”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probability variation 3” of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 4”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 1”, and the bonus content is “probability variation big hit 4”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probability variation 4” of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the big special symbol “probability variation 5” of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 2”, 8R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is “probability big hit 5”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probability variation 5” of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 6”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 2”, and the bonus content is “probability variation big hit 6”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probability 6” of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 7”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 2”, and the bonus content is “probability big hit 7”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probability 7” of the second special symbol is set to 70/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 8”, the winning pattern is “hit pattern 2” and the bonus content is “probability variation big hit 8”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probability 8” of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 9”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 2”, and the bonus content is “probability big hit 9”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probability 9” of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.
In the small hit symbol “small hit 1”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 3”, and the bonus content is “per special symbol 2”. The selection rate of the small hit symbol “small hit 1” is set to 100/100.
Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state does not have the concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  Further, the number of rounds is not limited to 5R and 8R, and a big hit of other round numbers may be provided. Also, the type of jackpot is not limited to those described above. The number of types of jackpots of the first special symbol may be increased, or the number of types of jackpots of the second special symbol may be increased.

  The number of big prize winning counts is set to count up to 10 as the maximum number of winnings per round. Although the count number (prescribed number / maximum number of winning prizes) of the big winning opening is “10”, it is not limited to this. The normal symbol hit probability is set to 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The probabilities at the low probability and the high probability are not limited to those described above. It is possible to appropriately adopt a probability that a higher probability is easier to win than a low probability. Moreover, you may make it win at the time of low probability.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as the opening / closing pattern of one round (one-round opening / closing pattern) for the first big prize opening 36.
The opening / closing patterns A and B are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. Note that the opening / closing pattern C in the small hit gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown together with other opening / closing patterns A and B for convenience. The first grand prize opening 36A is appropriately referred to as a big prize opening. The open / close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 59 are merely examples, and specific times for defining the open / close patterns may be other than those illustrated. Also, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is not limited to the above three types. Two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. However, when four or more types of opening / closing patterns of the big prize opening are provided, it is preferable to provide a number corresponding to the provided number.

The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 14s, the closed state is 4s, and then the open state continues again for 14s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state.
The section in which the open state is 14 s is a long open in which the open state of the big prize opening is relatively long. That is, the open / close pattern A is one in which a long open occurs once, then passes through the closed state once, and then a long open again occurs once. The total open time of the open / close pattern A is 28 s.
For convenience of explanation, a section in which the open state is 0.1 s or less is referred to as short open, a section in which the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 14 s is referred to as middle open, and a section in which the open state is 14 s or greater is referred to as long open.
In the open state where the short is open, it is extremely difficult to win a game ball in the grand prize opening, and in the open state where the middle is open, it is easier to win the game ball in the big prize opening than in the short opening. In the open state, which is long open, it is easier to win a game ball in the grand prize opening than in the middle release.
Moreover, the number of times and the time of the open state of the first big winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern A are not limited to those described above. For example, one open state is not limited to 14 s, and may be less than 14 s or may exceed 14 s, and a time in which a prescribed number of winnings can be made can be appropriately employed. Furthermore, about the frequency | count of an open state, it is not restricted to 2 times, It is good also as 1 time or 3 times or more.
Moreover, the long opening (second half part) in which the V prize can be awarded may be divided into a plurality of times. In other words, in the second half part, a closed state (closing time) of one or a plurality of first prize winning openings may be provided. For example, the long opening (opening time 14 s) may be an open state (opening time 5 s), a closed state (closing time 1 s), and an open state (opening time 9 s). According to this configuration, it becomes possible (easy) for the game ball to reach the rolling area 372 during the closing time of the first first prize opening 36A newly provided (in other words, the game ball is the first Opportunities to pass through the big prize opening 36B are increased), and it becomes easier to win V in the second half part.

The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern that is open once and continues for 14 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, the long opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 14 s.
In addition, about the frequency | count and time of the open state of the 1st big winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern B, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, one open state is not limited to 14 s, and may be less than 14 s or may exceed 14 s, and a time in which a prescribed number of winnings can be made can be appropriately employed. Furthermore, the number of times of the open state is not limited to once, and may be a plurality of times.
The open / close pattern A and the open / close pattern B may be opened for the same time, or the open / close pattern B may be open for a longer time than the open / close pattern A.

The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern that is opened only once for 1 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern C, middle opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 1 s.
In addition, about the frequency | count and time of the open state of the 1st big winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern C, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, one open state is not limited to 1 s, and may be less than 1 s or may exceed 1 s, and a time in which a prescribed number of winnings can be made can be appropriately employed. Furthermore, the number of times of the open state is not limited to once, and may be a plurality of times.
The opening pattern is not limited to the above three patterns. Two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. However, when four or more types of opening / closing patterns of the big prize opening are provided, it is preferable to provide a number corresponding to the provided number.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 is basically operated in conjunction with the open / close state of the first big winning opening 36 regardless of the big hit game state and the small hit game state. As shown in FIG. 60, in principle, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern) is that the specific region 38A is closed after the operation period in which the specific region 38A is in the open state is initially 0.1 s. Is defined as an operation pattern in which the non-operation period is 18 s, and the operation period of the open state is continued for 15 s. The total operation time of the displacement member operation pattern is 15.1 s.
During the operation period of 0.1 s, since the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively short, V winning in the specific area 38A becomes extremely difficult. On the other hand, during the operation period of 15 s at the longest, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so that V winning in the specific area 38A is relatively easy.
For the operation period of 15 s, in the first round in which the first grand prize opening 36 is opened and closed, for example, the first grand prize opening 36 is closed by reaching the upper prize number, for example, When a predetermined monitoring processing time relating to a residual sphere described later has passed, the displacement member 39 may be deactivated and the specific region 38A may be closed even before a predetermined 15 s has elapsed.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the round interval in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 3 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns). The “hit pattern 1” is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus “probable big hit 1” to “probable big hit 4” is specified and the specified round number is 5R.
In addition, the interval between rounds is the interval in which the grand prize opening is closed in the first round until the grand prize opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as an interval pattern between rounds, an interval pattern a in which the time for closing (closing time) is 1.3 s is defined.
In the “hit pattern 1”, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern a, the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the first round, and the first big prize opening 36 in all the second to fifth rounds. Is an opening / closing pattern B. That is, the “winning pattern 1” is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is possible in the 1Rth.

  The “hit pattern 2” is a hit pattern that occurs when the bonus “5 per probability variation big hit” to “9 per probability variation big hit” is specified and the prescribed round number is defined as 8R. In “hit pattern 2”, all the intervals between rounds are interval pattern a, the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the first to seventh rounds, and the first big prize opening 36 in the eighth round. Is an opening / closing pattern A. In other words, the “winning pattern 2” is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is possible at the 8th R.

  The “hit pattern 3” occurs when the bonus “small hit 1” occurs, and the first big winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern C only once. That is, in “winning pattern 3”, there is a possibility that a game ball may win the first big winning opening 36 and there may be a V win in the specific area 38A, but there is a V win in the specific area 38A. Even if it is, it will be executed on the assumption that it is not possible to enter the probability variation gaming state.

In each hit pattern, an open / close pattern is associated with each round in advance, but other open / close patterns may be associated with each round. For example, instead of the opening / closing pattern A, the opening / closing pattern B may be used as the 1R-th pattern in “hit pattern 1”.
Further, there may be two or more types of interval patterns. Further, the time of the interval pattern a may be a time other than the above.
Moreover, you may make it the same round about all the big hits. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that all the big hits are 8R, 6R to 8R are “open / close pattern B” for “hit pattern 1”, and 2R to 8R are “open / close pattern B” for “hit pattern 3”. In addition, since the “hit pattern 2” is 8R, an opening / closing pattern as shown in FIG. 61 can be adopted.

[Game state determination table]
FIG. 62 shows a game state determination table. The gaming state determination table is a table that is referred to in the processing of S1096 and the processing of S1100 of the main CPU 61 described later. In the gaming state determination table, the number of times of a short time after the big hit ends is defined according to the big hit symbol and the gaming state before the big hit transition.
For example, at the end of the big hit of the big hit symbol “probability change 1”, if the game state before the big hit transition is a non-probable change / non-short-time game state, and if a V win is made during the big hit, the number of time reductions will be 0 If it is determined and no V is won during the big hit, 30 times are determined as the number of time reductions (first record).
Also, for example, at the end of the big hit of the big hit symbol “probability change 1”, if the game state before the big hit transition is a non-probable change / short-time game state, and a V win is made during the big hit, the number of time reductions is 50 times. Is determined, and if the V is not won during the big hit, 30 times are determined as the number of time reductions (second record).

In the game state determination table, four types of “0”, “30”, “50”, and “100” are defined as the number of time reductions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other values are defined. May be.
Regardless of whether or not you have won the V prize, you may specify a value so that all or part of the jackpot will always be given the number of hours, and so that all or part of the jackpot will not be given the number of times A value may be specified.
Regardless of whether or not the V prize is won, there is a jackpot that is given the number of time reductions, but in all the big wins, either the case of winning the V prize or the case of not winning, the time reduction number is given, and on the other side the time reduction number is given You may prescribe | regulate a value so that it may not be provided.

[Game state and production mode of gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Note that the gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode, a second special mode, and a third special mode are implemented as an effect mode in the normal gaming state. Yes.
The normal mode is an effect mode of the non-probability changing gaming state or the probability changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. In the normal mode, an impression effect different from any of the first special mode to the third special mode and the special mode is performed.

In the normal mode, a big hit based on the first special symbol is made, and after the big hit is finished, the effect mode is shifted from the normal mode to any one of the special mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode.
More specifically, when the time reduction is not given in the big hit, the mode is shifted to the special mode. In addition, when the number of short hours given in jackpot is 30 times or 50 times, the mode shifts to the first special mode, and when the number of short hours given in jackpot is 100, the probability is 9/10. To shift to the first special mode (* condition 1). On the other hand, when the number of short hours given in the big hit is 100, the mode is shifted to the second special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 2).
Note that the transition ratio of the effect mode is not limited to the above-described value. For example, when the number of short hours given in the big hit is 100, the transition ratio may be set so that the transition to the second special mode is always (forced).

  In the normal mode, a big hit is made based on the second special symbol, and after the big win is over, there is a case where the normal mode is shifted to another effect mode, the details of which will be described later. In this embodiment, in the normal mode, the big win based on the second special symbol is a lottery by a lottery with a holding ball of the special symbol game related to the second special symbol (in the big hit lottery relating to the second special symbol) If you win).

The special mode is an effect mode of the non-probability changing gaming state or the probability changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. In the special mode, similar to the normal mode, an effect with an impression different from the other effect modes is performed.
In the special mode, it becomes a big hit based on the first special symbol, and after the big hit is finished, the effect mode is shifted as in the normal mode.
In the special mode, when the number of games (the number of special symbol games) has been consumed 30 times, the effect mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode.

The first special mode is an effect mode in a non-probability changing gaming state or a probability-changing gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (the number of time savings is “30”, “50”, or “100”). In the first special mode, it is possible to identify the short-time gaming state, but it is difficult to identify whether or not the probability-changing gaming state is present.
In the first special mode, the jackpot is based on the second special symbol, and after the jackpot is over, the first special mode may be shifted to another effect mode. Details thereof will be described later.
In the first special mode, when the short-time gaming state is ended, the effect mode is shifted from the first special mode to the normal mode.

The second special mode is an effect mode in a non-probability changing gaming state or a probability changing gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (the number of times shortened is “100”). In the second special mode, it is possible to identify the short-time gaming state, but an effect is made in which it is difficult to identify whether or not the probability-changing gaming state is present.
Since the effect in the second special mode is an effect that is performed when the number of time reductions is given 100 times, according to the effect in the second special mode, the player has confirmed that the number of time reductions has been given 100 times. Recognizable.
Since the performance of the first special mode can be performed even when the number of time reductions is given 100 times, the player expects that the number of time reductions is given 100 times even in the first special mode. it can.
In the second special mode, the jackpot is based on the second special symbol, and after the jackpot is over, the second special mode may be shifted to another effect mode. Details thereof will be described later.
In the second special mode, when the short-time gaming state is ended, the effect mode is shifted from the second special mode to the normal mode.

The third special mode is an effect mode in the non-probability changing gaming state or the probability changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (the number of time reductions is “100”). When the effect mode of the game state before the transition is the third special mode for the second special symbol jackpot, an effect having a content advantageous to the player (in a broad sense, notification) is performed in this jackpot. That is, the third special mode is an effect mode characterized by being related to a player's profit. More specifically, an effect is provided that allows the player to acquire a greater number of time reductions, and if the number of time reductions that can be awarded is the same, an effect that encourages a V prize is provided. Done.
In the third special mode, it becomes a big hit based on the second special symbol, and after the big hit is finished, there is a case where the third special mode is shifted to another effect mode, the details will be described later.
In the third special mode, when the short-time gaming state is finished, the effect mode is shifted from the third special mode to the normal mode.

  Next, in any one of the normal mode and the first special mode to the third special mode, a big hit based on the second special symbol (a big hit of any one of “probable big hit 5” to “probable big hit 9”) is made. An effect mode that is shifted to after the completion will be described.

(In the case of “5 probable big hits” or “6 probable big hits”)
When the number of short hours given in the jackpot is 30 or 50, the effect mode is shifted to the first special mode (* condition 3). In the case where the number of times given in the jackpot is 100, basically, the production mode is shifted to the first special mode with a probability of 9/10 (* condition 3), and the probability of 1/10 Will shift to the third special mode (* condition 4). However, when the production mode before the big hit transition is the third special mode and 100 times are given as the number of time reductions, the mode is forcibly shifted to the third special mode (* condition 4). In addition, when the time reduction is not given in the big hit, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode.

(In the case of “7 probable big hits”)
After the big hit, the production mode basically shifts to the first special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 5) and shifts to the second special mode with a probability of 7/10 (* conditions). 6) Transition to the third special mode with a probability of 2/10 (* condition 7). However, when the production mode before the big hit is the third special mode, the mode is forcibly shifted to the third special mode (* condition 7). Further, when the number of time reductions is not given in the big hit, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.
Note that the transition ratio of the effect mode is not limited to the above-described value. For example, the transition ratio may be set so as to forcibly shift to the second special mode.

(In the case of “probable big hit 8” or “probable big hit 9”)
In the case where the number of times given in the big hit is 100, the production mode is shifted to the second special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 8), and the third special mode with a probability of 9/10. (* Condition 9). Further, when the number of time reductions is not given in the big hit, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.
In addition, even if the production mode before the big hit starts is the third special mode and 100 times is given as the number of time reductions in the big hit, the above-described transition ratio is the same. Further, the transition ratio of the effect mode is not limited to the above-described value. For example, when 100 is given as the number of time reductions in the big hit, the transition ratio may be set so as to forcibly shift to the second special mode.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 69 show processing by the main CPU 61, and FIGS. 70 to 77 show processing by the sub CPU 71. In addition, about the process which is the same as that of the process shown in 1st Embodiment, or a similar process, the description is simplified or abbreviate | omitted suitably.

The main CPU 61 includes game state transition control means, probability change game state control means, non-probability change game state control means, number of times determination means, time-short game state control means, non-time-short game state control means, and round game execution means (first round game). Various means such as execution means and second round game execution means) are realized.
For example, the main CPU 61 functions as a gaming state transition control means capable of transition control to a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. Further, for example, in the big hit game state, the main CPU 61 receives the identification information in a specific manner after the big hit game state ends based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means. It functions as a probability-changing gaming state control means capable of controlling to a probability-changing gaming state with a relatively high probability of stop display. Further, for example, in the big hit game state, the main CPU 61 identifies in a specific manner after the big hit game state ends based on the fact that the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means. It functions as a non-probability changing gaming state control means capable of controlling the non-probability changing gaming state with a relatively low probability that information is stopped and displayed. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 functions as a number determination unit that can determine any number of times from among a plurality of times. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 functions as a time-short gaming state control means that can be controlled to a time-short gaming state including a state in which the opening / closing member is relatively easily opened after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, for example, the main CPU 61 has the opening / closing member relatively open on the condition that the number of times the identification information has been variably displayed after being controlled to the short-time gaming state has reached the number determined by the number determination means. It functions as non-short-time gaming state control means that can be controlled to a non-short-time gaming state including a state that is difficult to become.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the main CPU 61. The timer update process of FIG. 64 is configured by almost the same steps as the timer update process of FIG. 20, except that the process of S80 of the first embodiment is not provided in this timer update process. This is because, in the present embodiment, the winning rounds are not fixed.
That is, when the main CPU 61 makes an affirmative determination in the determination process of S1007, or when an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of S1009, in S1010, the control state flag indicates a value indicating that the special winning opening is being opened ( 04H) is performed.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol-related switch check process of FIG. 65 is configured by almost the same steps as the special symbol-related switch check process of FIG. 22, but in this special symbol-related switch check process, the process of S103 of the first embodiment is provided. Not different. This is because in the present embodiment, the second grand prize opening 37A is not provided.
That is, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol related switch check processing routine when the first first prize opening switch check processing of S1022 is ended.

[First big prize exit switch check process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first big prize opening switch check process of FIG. 66 is configured by substantially the same steps as the first big prize opening switch check process of FIG. 25, but the first big prize opening switch check process is the first embodiment. The timing of performing the process of S135 is different from the determination content of the determination process of S136. With respect to the processing timing, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the specific area passing command is not supplied to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. On the other hand, the content of the determination is a change by eliminating the probability variation control at the time of small hit.
That is, in S1035, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “1” or more. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “1” or more, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S1036 and determines that the value of the special winning opening open number counter is not “1” or more. In step S1042, the process proceeds to step S1042.
Further, after finishing the process of S1040, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a constant area passing command in S1041. If this process ends, the process moves to S1042.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol display time management process of FIG. 66 is configured by almost the same steps as the special symbol display time management process of FIG. 31, but in this special symbol display time management process, the processing content of S230 of the first embodiment is the same. Different.
That is, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing etc.) a game state command in the main RAM 63 in S1060. The gaming state command is a command type (information indicating that it is a gaming state command), information indicating a gaming state (non-probability / non-time reduction, probability change / non-time reduction, non-probability change / time reduction, probability change / time reduction), and the number of probability changes. Is a command including information indicating the remaining number of times (“0”) and information indicating the remaining number of times (“0”, “20”, or “70”) as the number of time reductions. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the state of the probability change gaming state and the short time gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S1061.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. The process for opening the big prize opening in FIG. 68 includes almost the same steps as the process for opening the big prize opening in FIG. 34, but the process during opening of the big prize opening includes the process of S276 of the first embodiment. Not different. This is because in the present embodiment, the second grand prize opening 37A is not provided.
In other words, when the main CPU 61 ends the process of setting a predetermined value in the residual sphere monitoring timer in S1075, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S1076.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process of FIG. 69 is configured by almost the same steps as the hit end interval management process of FIG. 35. However, in the hit end interval management process of FIG. 69, the processes of S295, S296, and S300 of the first embodiment are performed. Processing contents are different.
That is, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “30” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63 in S1095. The value to be set is not limited to “30”, and other values may be adopted. If this process ends, the process moves to S1096.
In step S <b> 1096, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value (any one of “0”, “30”, “50”, and “100”) as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction number counter in the main RAM 63. . More specifically, the main CPU 61 uses the gaming state determination table shown in FIG. 62 to determine a predetermined value based on the type of jackpot (hit symbol), the gaming state before the jackpot transition, and the presence or absence of a V prize. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S1097.
In S 1100, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value (any one of “0”, “30”, “50”, and “100”) to the value of the time-count counter in the main RAM 63. Since this process is the same as the process of S1096, description thereof is omitted. If this process ends, the process moves to S1101.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The timer update process of FIG. 70 is configured by almost the same steps as the timer update process of FIG. 40, but the process content of S357 of the first embodiment is different in this timer update process.
That is, in step S1117, the sub CPU 71 performs a firing notification flag setting process to switch the firing notification mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets “02H” when the current value is “01H”, sets “04H” when the current value is “03H”, and sets the current value. If the value is “04H”, “03H” is set. If this process ends, the process moves to S1118. The launch notification flag is a flag that allows the sub CPU 71 to identify whether or not to notify the launch of the game ball. In the case of “00H”, the notification is not performed (terminated), and other than “00H” In this case, notification is made (continued).
In this embodiment, when the firing notification flag value is “01H”, the “first half part” is notified, and when the firing notification flag value is “02H”, the “second half part” is notified. When the value of the notification flag is “03H”, a notification (“DANGER”, “please wait for a while”, etc.) suggesting the stop of the launch operation is performed, and when the value of the launch notification flag is “04H”, the launch operation is started. Notifications to suggest (“right-handed”, “hit!”, Etc.) are performed, and when the value of the firing notification flag is “05H”, “right-handed” notification is performed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The command analysis process of FIG. 71 is configured by almost the same steps as the command analysis process of FIG. 41, but the command analysis process does not provide the first effect mode change process of S364 of the first embodiment, The processing content of S366 is different. In this command analysis process, the name of the second effect mode change process in S378 of the first embodiment is changed to “effect mode change process” by not providing the first effect mode change process (S1137).
That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process in S1125. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

The decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numerals “1” to “9”, and these decorative symbols (numeric characters) have a predetermined number (for example, three (3 When the digits)) are aligned with the same decorative symbols (numbers), the game will basically shift to the big hit gaming state.
More specifically, "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 4" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, "probability variation 5" to "probability variation 9" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol, and the small bonus symbol With regard to “small hit 1”, the decorative pattern corresponding to “probability variation 7” is the decoration corresponding to the number “7” assortment, “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6”, “probability variation 8”, and “probability variation 9”. The design is a number of “1” to “6”, “8”, or “9”, and the decorative design corresponding to “one small hit” is the combination of the numbers “- The decorative pattern corresponding to the specific event or loss that is “-” is a non-specific event. The stop symbol may not correspond to the specific symbol.
As described above, the decorative symbols corresponding to “probability 1” to “probability 6”, “probability 8”, and “probability 9” are the numbers “1” to “6”, “8”, or “ By adopting a configuration in which any of the 9 ”lines can be used, when the decorative symbols other than the“ 7 ”line are stopped, from the stopped pattern,“ probability 1 ”to“ It is not possible to know which jackpot is “probability 6”, “probability 8”, or “probability 9”.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process of FIG. 72 is configured by substantially the same steps as the hit effect pattern determination process of FIG. 42, but the process contents of S390 of the first embodiment are different in the main hit effect pattern determination process.
That is, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process in S1150. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “05H” in the winning effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received winning start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1151. Here, “01H” corresponds to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 4”, “02H” corresponds to “probability variation 5” and “probability variation 6”, “03H” corresponds to “probability variation 7”, “ “04H” corresponds to “probability variation 8” and “probability variation 9”, and “05H” corresponds to “small hit 1”.

[V winning notification process]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning notification process is a process for notifying the V winning, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in S1160, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notifying process routine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S1161.

  In S1161, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. The V winning notification flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not the V winning notification has been performed. When the V winning notification is performed, “01H” is set as the value of the V winning notification flag, and when the V winning notification is not performed, “00H” is set as the value of the V winning notification flag. The If this process ends, the process moves to S1162.

  In S1162, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “05H” to the value of the firing notification flag. With this processing, the notification “right-handed” corresponding to “05H” is performed in the processing of S1180 in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1163.

  In S1163, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing notification timer. When this process is finished, the V winning notification process routine is finished.

[Direction processing during round]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the in-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents for each round, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in S1170, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S1171.

  In S1171, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V prize is notified. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S1180. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S1172.

  In S1172, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not “small hit 1”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S1180. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S <b> 1173.

  In S1173, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is “1” or “8”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning is in a round (1R or 8R). If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is “1” or “8”, it moves the process to S1174. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is neither “1” nor “8”, it moves the process to S1179.

  In S1174, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode before the big hit transition is the third special mode. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is “05H”, it moves the process to S1175. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not “05H”, it moves the process to S1177.

  In S1175, the sub CPU 71 sets “03H” or “04H” in the firing notification flag. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the firing notification flag according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. For example, “04H” is set when the first half part has more time reductions, and “03H” is set when the second part has more time reductions. If this process ends, the process moves to S1176. If both are the same, “03H” is set to promote the V prize, but “04H” is set when an illegal act is detected (radio wave detection, magnetic detection, etc.). By doing so, you may comprise so that it may become disadvantageous to a fraudulent person.

  In S1176, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the firing notification timer. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to Y seconds (15 seconds) shorter than X seconds (18 seconds), which is the time from when the first opening of the displacement member 39 is performed until the long opening that allows V winnings to be performed. . The predetermined value Y seconds related to the firing notification time is set in view of, for example, reaching the substantially central portion of the rolling region 372 in 2 to 2.1 seconds from the start of “right-handed” (start of firing operation). Is. For example, if a launch operation is performed according to “right-handed” displayed after 15 seconds, the first grand prize winning opening has not been opened long after about 2 seconds, and the game ball is basically Then, it reaches the rolling region 372. In other words, the game ball “right-handed” in accordance with the notification that is triggered by the firing notification time is not detected by the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, but is detected by the first big prize opening second count switch 360B. Can be detected. Further, since the launch interval of the game balls is 0.66 seconds, when the game balls are continuously fired, a plurality of game balls reach the rolling area 372 and the first grand prize opening No. 2 It can be detected by the count switch 360B. If this process ends, the process moves to S1180. The present embodiment is not limited to the above-described processing, and may be a value larger or smaller than the above-described value “15”. However, it is preferable to set the time so that the round does not end before winning the V prize. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, a section in which the open state is 0.1 s or less is short open, a section in which the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 14 s is middle open, and a section in which the open state is 14 s or more. Is referred to as long open.

  In S <b> 1177, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” as the value of the firing notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1178.

  In S1178, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the firing notification timer. Since this process is the same as the process of S1176, the description thereof is omitted. If this process ends, the process moves to S1180.

  In S <b> 1179, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “05H” to the value of the firing notification flag. Since the second to seventh rounds are only the first half part, a value “05H” indicating right-handed is set. If this process ends, the process moves to S1180.

  In S1180, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data during the round according to the winning effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is finished, the round production process routine is finished.

[Round-to-round production processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an inter-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. In the inter-round effect process of FIG. 75, the processing contents of S420, S421, and S422 of the first embodiment are mainly different. In addition, in S1190-S1192, it is the process for once terminating the present discharge alert | report, when not winning V.
In S1190, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S1193. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S <b> 1191.

  In S 1191, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the firing notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1192.

  In S 1192, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S1193.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in S1200, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the firing notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1201.

  In S1201, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S1202.

  In S1202, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S1203.

  In S1203, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1204.

  In S1204, the sub CPU 71 sets the winning end effect data corresponding to the winning effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the end hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Direction mode change processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in S1210, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “00H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a gaming state command based on time reduction and / or probability change. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “00H”, the process proceeds to S1211. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “00H”, the process proceeds to S1213.

  In S1211, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the remaining short number of times indicated by the gaming state command is 1 or more. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”, the effect mode change processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S1212.

  In S1212, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. With this process, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

  In step S1213, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the “small hit 1” has ended. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “05H”, the process proceeds to S1216. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “05H”, the process proceeds to S1214.

  In S <b> 1214, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect mode transition determination process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to change the effect mode based on at least one of the number of time reductions (number of times given) and the current effect mode (the effect mode before the big hit). In the following, the transition of the production mode based on the number of times of giving time and the production mode before the big hit will be described.

(Time reduction count = 0, production mode unquestioned)
The sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the special mode when it is the end of the big hit of the first special symbol, and determines to shift to the normal mode when it is the end of the big hit of the second special symbol.

(Time reduction count = "30" or "50", when the production mode is not required)
The sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the first special mode when it is either the end of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol.

(Time reduction count = "100", in normal mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the first special mode with a probability of “9/10” when the end of the big hit of the first special symbol “probability 3”, and with the probability of “1/10”. 2 Determined to shift to the special mode. Further, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the third special mode when the big special jackpot of the second special symbol is completed.

(Time reduction count = "100", in case of 3rd special mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines the second special symbol with a probability of “1/10” when either of the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probability 8” and the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probability 9”. It is determined to shift to the mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of “9/10”. Further, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the third special mode when neither the big hit end of the second special symbol “probability change 8” nor the big hit end of the second special symbol “probability change 9” is reached. .

(Time reduction count = "100", 1st special mode, 2nd special mode, or special mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the first special mode with a probability of “9/10” when the end of the big hit of the first special symbol “probability 3”, and with the probability of “1/10”. 2 Determined to shift to the special mode.
The sub CPU 71 determines the second special symbol with a probability of “9/10” if either the big special jackpot of the second special symbol “probability variation 5” or the big special jackpot of the second special symbol “probability variation 6” is reached. It is determined to shift to the mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of “1/10”.
If the second special symbol “probability change 7” is the end of the big hit, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the first special mode with a probability of “1/10”, and with the probability of “7/10” It is determined to shift to the 2 special mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of “2/10”.
The sub CPU 71 determines the second special symbol with a probability of “1/10” when either of the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probability 8” and the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probability 9”. It is determined to shift to the mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of “9/10”.
In the present embodiment, the probability related to the mode transition is indicated as “x / y”, but the probability is realized by performing a predetermined random number lottery.

  In step S1215, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the determination result to the value of the effect mode flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1216.

  In S1216, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

  The sub CPU 71 implements various means such as effect mode determination means and effect execution means.

78 and 79 are diagrams showing an example of the effect screen and the effect screen flow. In the following, when the production mode is shifted in the order of normal mode, special mode, and normal mode (first case), when the transition is made in the order of normal mode, first special mode, third special mode, and normal mode (second) Case) will be taken as an example, and the characteristic effects of this embodiment will be described.
SC101 to SC144 are effect contents displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the constituent elements on the screen are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

(First case)
SC101 shows an aspect in which the decorative symbols are changed in the normal mode. In this example, since the lottery of the first special symbol is won, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped (SC102), and the fact that the big hit is displayed is displayed on the screen (SC103). An effect is performed (SC104 to SC1110).
In this case, because the number of time reductions was not given in the big hit (the number of time reductions was 0), the production mode was changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and the screen was changed to the special mode ("Special mode "Inrush" etc.) is performed (SC111).
Thereafter, the game progresses and the number of games (the number of special symbol games) is thirty times (SC112 to SC113), the effect mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode (SC114), and the game is performed in the normal mode. (SC115).

(Second case)
SC101 to SC110 are the same as the first case, and in this case, 30 times are given as the number of time reductions in the big hit of the first special symbol, so the production mode is shifted from the normal mode to the first special mode. On the screen, an effect indicating that the mode has been shifted to the first special mode (such as “entering the first special mode”) is performed (SC116).

Thereafter, the game progresses to become a jackpot of “Probability 8” (SC117 to SC120), and an effect is performed in the jackpot (SC121 to SC125). In the big hit, more accurately, the big shift of “probability change 8” and “probability change 9” that is likely to be transferred to the third special mode, V winning is possible in the 8R, and in the 7R before that, An effect ("The next round, catching the time with your own power", etc.) is performed (SC123).
In addition, since the V winning is possible in the latter half part of the 8R in the big hit, the notification (“first half part”, “second half part”, etc.) regarding the timing at which the V winning can be performed is performed (SC124, SC125).

In general, if the player grasps that the production of the “first half part” is performed on the screen, the number of winning balls reaches 10 and the round ends. In order to avoid this, the game ball is not fired (winned), and the game ball is fired when the “second half part” performance is performed, aiming for the V prize.
However, in the jackpot, 0 or 100 times are determined as the number of time reductions based on the gaming state before the jackpot transition and the presence or absence of the V prize, so that the player knows the gaming state before the transition that is grasped. Based on whether or not to aim for the V prize, the game is played.
According to this configuration, the player's own judgment leads to the acquisition of profit (the number of times reduced in this example), so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In this example, by winning V, 100 times were obtained as the number of time reductions, and since a predetermined lottery was won, a “V” effect was performed on the screen (SC126), and the effect mode was changed from the first special mode to the third special mode. The mode is shifted to the special mode (SC127).
Thereafter, the game progresses to become a big hit of “Probability Change 7” (SC128 to SC131), and an effect is performed in the big hit (SC132 to SC135). In the big hit of “probability change 7”, regardless of the game state before the big hit, 100 times are given as the number of time reductions, so that the effect of prompting the V winning is performed at the 8th R where the V winning is possible. In other words, in the first half part where V prize is not won (V winning is difficult), the effects of refraining from winning ("DANGER", "Please wait for a while", etc.) are performed, and in the latter half part where V winning is easy, the effect that prompts the winning ( “Right-handed”, “Strike-!” Etc.) are performed.
In this example, since the V prize is won, the game is in a probable / short game state. In the big hit of “probability change 7”, when the effect mode before the big hit is the third special mode, the third special mode is forcibly changed (in other words, the third special mode is maintained). ).

  Thereafter, the game progresses to become a big hit of “Probability 9” (SC137 to SC140), and an effect is performed in the big hit (SC141 to SC143). In the big hit, the player ignores the performance and plays the game (in other words, because the player wins V), the performance mode is shifted from the third special mode to the normal mode (SC144).

  Here, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions is determined based on the gaming state determination table of FIG. Looking at the jackpot of “probability change 9” in the gaming state determination table, if the game state before the jackpot transition is the probability change / short-time game state, the number of time reductions will not be given when winning V in the jackpot. When V is not won, 100 is given as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, regarding the production mode, in the big hit of “probability change 9”, when the game state before the big hit transition is the probability change / short-time game state and the production mode is the third special mode, the number of time reductions is not given. In the case of the normal mode, the third special mode is maintained when 100 times are given as the number of time reductions. In other words, in the big win of “Probability 9”, when the V prize is won, the number of time reductions is not given, the production mode is shifted to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player, and when the V prize is not won, The number of time reductions is given 100 times, and the third special mode is maintained, which is advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, in the big hit 8R, it is difficult (impossible) to win V in the first half part and easy (possible) V winning in the second half part. Therefore, in this example, in order not to win the V prize, an effect (“right-handed”, “hit-!”, Etc.) that prompts the first half part to shoot a game ball is performed (SC141), and the second half part is a game ball. (Such as “DANGER”, “Please wait for a while”) is performed (SC142).
However, since the player has won the V prize, an effect that the V prize has been made is performed (SC143), and an effect that the effect mode has been changed from the third special mode to the normal mode is performed (SC144).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, another aspect (modification) of the winning device mechanism in the second embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the first mode of the winning device mechanism includes a first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, a first big prize opening second count switch 360B, a first big prize opening shutter 361A, This is realized including a first grand prize opening shutter 361B, a second big prize opening shutter 371A, a rolling region 372, a specific region 38A, a non-specific region 38B, discharge ports 38X and 38Y, and a displacement member 39.
Here, the shutters (first big prize opening shutter 361A, first big prize opening shutter 361B, and second big prize opening shutter 371A) are opened and closed (driven) according to the pattern shown in FIG. At this time, the first big prize opening shutter 361A and the first big prize opening shutter 361B perform an opening / closing operation (drive) simultaneously when opening and closing the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B, and the second large prize opening shutter 361B. The winning opening shutter 371A opens and closes when opening and closing the second large winning opening 37A.
57 is different from the winning device mechanism of FIG. 57 in that a second large winning opening shutter 371A is provided. By providing the second grand prize opening shutter 371A, in a state where the second big prize opening shutter 371A is opened, the game ball passes through the second big prize opening 37A and is located behind the main prize winning mechanism. Led. Further, in the present winning apparatus mechanism, for example, the second grand prize opening and the first grand prize opening are controlled in an open state, and one of the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening is closed. When the “right-handed” is started after the big hit starts by making the time from the displacement to the open state to the other open time extremely short (for example, 0.1 second), the first big prize opening first Detection by the count switch 360A or a switch for detecting a game ball won in a second grand prize opening (not shown) makes detection by the first big prize mouth second count switch 360B and passage to the specific area 38 extremely difficult. You may comprise so that it may become. The rest of the configuration is the same as that of the winning device mechanism of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the second mode of the winning device mechanism is realized including the same components as the winning device mechanism of the first mode. First grand prize port first count switch 360A, first grand prize port second count switch 360B, first big prize port shutter 361A, first big prize port shutter 361B, second big prize port shutter 371A, rolling area 372 The arrangement of is the same as in the first embodiment, but the arrangement of the specific region 38A, the non-specific region 38B, the discharge ports 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39 is different. In the present prize winning device mechanism, the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A, and the discharge port 38X are sequentially provided on the left side of the lowermost partition, and the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided on the right side of the partition. ing.
In the present winning device mechanism, the inclined portion 410 is provided so that the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A can pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the present winning mechanism is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 38A regardless of which of the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B. In addition, about the length and angle of the inclination part 410, a suitable structure can be employ | adopted in the range which can implement | achieve the structure which can pass the specific area | region 38A. Further, the opening / closing operation (driving) of each shutter (first big prize opening shutter 361A, first big prize opening shutter 361B, and second big prize opening shutter 371A) is the same as FIG. Description is omitted.

<Effects obtained by the configuration described above>
According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the gaming state determination table, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is defined according to the jackpot symbol and the gaming state before the jackpot transition (FIG. 62). However, in a broader sense, the number of time reductions after the jackpot may be defined according to the jackpot symbol. For example, a specific big hit game state may be provided, and if the V win is won in the big hit game state, 0 may be given as the number of reduced hours, and 30 may be given as the reduced number of times if no V win is won. That is, in this jackpot game state, when a game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the first number (for example, 0) is determined as the number of times that the benefit of the short-time game state can be enjoyed, and the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. If not, a second number greater than the first number (for example, 30 times) can be determined. Therefore, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A after the big hit game state, the second short time game state Can enjoy. In this way, by providing a possibility that the case where the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A is more advantageous than the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the interest is improved. be able to.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1” is the non-probability variation / non-short-time gaming state, the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A. When the first number (for example, 0 times) is determined and there is no passage, a second number (for example, 30 times) greater than the first number is determined (see FIG. 62 and the like). On the other hand, when the game state before the transition to the big hit game state of “probability change 1” is the probability change / non-short-time game state, if the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A, the second number (for example, 30 In the case where there is no passage, a first number (for example, 0) smaller than the second number is determined. As described above, in determining the number of times related to the short-time gaming state, in addition to the presence or absence of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A, the game state before the transition to the big hit gaming state of “probability change 1” is taken into account. Since the situation where the degree becomes extremely low can be solved, the interest can be further improved. Further, when the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A, the second number is determined. When there is no pass, the first number less than the second number may be determined. Since the case where the game ball does not pass does not necessarily have an advantage over the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, it is possible to provide novel gameplay.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device have the same or substantially the same displacement mode, “probability variation 1” big hit gaming state and “probability variation 2” big hit gaming state are provided. (FIGS. 58 to 61, etc.), it is difficult for the player to find out which jackpot gaming state is in the displacement mode of the variable winning device.
In addition, in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change 1”, when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1” is the non-probability change / non-short-time gaming state, the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A If there is, the first number (for example, 0 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the second number (for example, 30 times) greater than the first number is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2”, when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2” is the non-probability variation / non-short-time gaming state, the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A If there is, the second number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the first number (for example, 0) less than the second number is determined.
In other words, by providing the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1” and the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2”, even if the result of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A is the same, Profits (eg, number of times, duration) can be different.
Therefore, since the profit of the short-time gaming state that can be enjoyed by the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1” and the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2” can be adjusted, it is possible to further improve the interest. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to find out which jackpot gaming state is from the displacement mode of the variable winning device, the player can enter the specific area 38A so that the benefits of the short-time gaming state that can be enjoyed are always increased. Since it becomes impossible to select whether or not the game ball has passed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is extremely advantageous and the game store is extremely disadvantageous.

  According to the configuration described above, for example, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability change 1” is the probability change / short-time game state, if the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A, If one number (for example, 30 times) is determined and there is no passage, a second number (for example, 50 times) greater than the first number is determined. In other words, it shifts from the state of the probability change / short-time gaming state to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1”, and when it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1”, the jackpot of “probability variation 1” In the case of shifting to the non-probability changing gaming state after the gaming state is ended, the benefits of the short-time gaming state can be enjoyed more, so that a situation in which the degree of advantage becomes extremely high can be avoided.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the gaming state determination table, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is defined according to the jackpot symbol and the gaming state before the jackpot transition (FIG. 62). However, in a broader sense, the number of time reductions after the jackpot may be defined according to the jackpot symbol and whether or not the gaming state before the jackpot transition is a probability change gaming state. For example, when a specific jackpot gaming state is provided and the gaming state before the jackpot transition is a probabilistic gaming state, if the V win is won in the jackpot gaming state, the time is reduced 30 times, and if the V winning is not won, the time is shortened. When 50 is given as the number of times and the game state before the big hit transition is an uncertain change game state, the number of time reductions is 50 times when the V win is won in the big hit game state, and the number of short times when the V win is not won It is good also as a structure given 30 times as.
That is, when the game state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A, the first number (for example, 30 times) is determined and passed. If there is no, the second number (for example, 50 times) larger than the first number is determined. On the other hand, when the gaming state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state, if there is a passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A, the fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined, When there is no passage, a third number (for example, 30 times) smaller than the fourth number is determined. Thus, in determining the number of times related to the short-time gaming state, in addition to the presence or absence of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A, the gaming state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is taken into account and enjoyed after the big hit gaming state ends. It is possible to improve interest by making it possible to change the short game state when it is obtained.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device have the same or substantially the same displacement mode, “probability variation 1” big hit gaming state and “probability variation 2” big hit gaming state are provided. (FIGS. 58 to 61, etc.), it is difficult for the player to find out which jackpot gaming state is in the displacement mode of the variable winning device.
Also, for example, in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change 1”, when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1” is the probability variation gaming state, the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A. In this case, a first number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, a second number (for example, 50 times) greater than the first number is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2”, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2” is the probability variation gaming state, when a game ball has passed to the specific area 38A, If the second number (for example, 50 times) is determined and there is no passage, the first number (for example, 30 times) is determined.
In addition, in the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1”, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 1” is the non-probability variation gaming state, a game ball has passed to the specific area 38A. When the fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined and there is no passage, the third number (for example, 30 times) smaller than the fourth number is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2”, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of “probability variation 2” is the non-probability variation gaming state, the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A. The third number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and when there is no passage, the fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined.
Thus, even if the result of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A is the same, the profit that can enjoy the short-time game state can be adjusted according to the type of the big hit game state, and the situation where the game becomes monotonous is eliminated. Therefore, the interest can be further improved. Furthermore, even if the player knows whether or not the gaming state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state, the player knows which of the big hit gaming state is based on the displacement mode of the variable winning device. Since it is difficult to select whether or not to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A so that the profit that can be enjoyed in the short-time game state is always increased, the player becomes extremely advantageous, and the game store The situation that becomes extremely disadvantageous can be avoided.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, when the production mode before the transition to the big hit gaming state is, in other words, the production mode before the transition to the big hit gaming state is the third special mode, the specific area 38A is entered. Specific effects related to the number of times determined based on the passing result of game balls (effects that prompt the game balls to stop firing (“DANGER”, “please wait” etc.)), effects that prompt the game balls to fire (“right-handed” ”,“ Hit-! ”Etc.))) and the like (FIG. 79 etc.). According to this configuration, the player who has grasped the number of times determined based on the result of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A by the specific effect can enjoy the number of times related to the short-time gaming state more. The game can be played based on self-determination as to whether or not to pass the game ball. In this way, it is possible to provide novel gaming characteristics by directly connecting the effect mode before the transition to the big hit gaming state to the profit to the player.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit gaming state of “probability change 7”, the fifth number (for example, 100 times) is determined regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A. In addition, when the production mode before the transition to the big hit gaming state of “probability change 7” is the third special mode, a specific production that prompts the game ball to pass to the specific area 38A (the production to refrain from winning (“DANGER”, “ Please wait for a while, etc.), and the effect of prompting a prize (“right-handed”, “hit-!”, Etc.)) can be executed (FIG. 79, etc.).
With this configuration, when the player recognizes the specific performance, the player knows that the game state is a jackpot game state of “probability change 7”, passes the game ball to the specific area 38A, and ends the jackpot game state of “probability change 7”. Later, you can enjoy the probable gaming state. Thus, by providing a specific effect that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to eliminate a situation where the game becomes monotonous, and thus it is possible to further improve the interest.

  According to the configuration described above, for example, a game ball can pass over the first grand prize opening 36A and reach the first big prize opening 36B (FIG. 57, etc.). On the other hand, the game ball can pass through the specific area 38A when it passes through the first big winning opening 36B. In other words, since the game balls can be prevented from passing to the first grand prize opening 36B by the first big prize opening 36A, it is basically possible to allow the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B to pass for a long time. The game ball can pass through the first grand prize opening 36A, and it is still difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, making it difficult to shift to the probability-changing gaming state. In this way, in the big hit gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the probability changing gaming state, it is possible to pass through a long time at the first big winning opening 36A so that a large number of game balls can pass, thereby resulting in a significantly disadvantageous big hit gaming state. Since the situation can be resolved, the interest can be improved.

  According to the configuration described above, for example, the second big prize opening 37A is provided between the first big prize opening 36A and the first big prize opening 36B (FIG. 79, etc.). By providing the second grand prize winning port 37A in this way, when the first grand prize winning port 36A is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first grand prize winning port 36A is passed over to the first grand prize winning port 36B. Since the game ball can pass through the second grand prize opening 37A, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the first big prize opening 36B. Further, in this configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 36B can pass through the specific area 38A, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will pass through the specific area 38A and be controlled to the probability variation gaming state. Become.

  In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the techniques in the other embodiments can be applied to each other as long as the characteristic configuration and the essential effect are not inhibited.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device 32 1st starting port 33 2nd starting port 34 Blade member 35 Passage gate 36A, 36B, 36C 1st big winning port 361A, 361B, 361C 1st big winning port shutter 37A, 37B Second big prize opening 371A, 371B Second big prize opening shutter 38A Specific area 38B Non-specific area 39 Displacement member 53 First special symbol display section 54 Second special symbol display section 61 Main CPU
63 Main RAM
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 Dispensing device

Claims (3)

A game board having a game area;
Launching means capable of launching a game medium in the game area;
A first passing area through which a game medium rolling in the gaming area can pass;
A first displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the first passage region and a second position that is difficult;
A game medium that rolls in the game area can pass therethrough, and a second passage area provided at a predetermined interval with respect to the first passage area;
A second displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the second passage area and a second position that is difficult;
A game medium that rolls in the game area can pass through, and a third passage area provided between the first passage area and the second passage area;
A third displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the third passage area and a second position that is difficult;
Specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Game state control means for controlling to a specific game state on condition that a positive determination is made by the specific game state transition determination means;
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing a first advantageous game for controlling the first displacement member and the second displacement member to a first position a predetermined number of times in a specific game state controlled by the game state control means;
Second advantageous game execution means capable of executing a second advantageous game for controlling the third displacement member to the first position a predetermined number of times in a specific gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means;
With
The specific game state controlled by the game state control means includes a specific game state in which the second advantageous game is executed after the first advantageous game is executed, and then the first advantageous game is executed.
When the game medium is launched in a predetermined direction by the launching means, the game medium can pass over the third passage area after passing over the first passage area, and then pass over the second passage area. A gaming machine. A specific area through which the game medium that has passed through the first passage area and / or the game medium that has passed through the second passage area can pass;
A variable member capable of changing between an easy-to-pass state in which the game medium can easily pass through the specific area and a difficult-to-pass state in which passage is difficult;
Based on the fact that a game medium has passed through the specific area during the first advantageous game being executed by the first advantageous game execution means in the specific game state controlled by the gaming state control means, the specific gaming state Special gaming state control means capable of controlling to a special gaming state that is easily determined to shift to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state transition determining means after the end of
With
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means includes
The total time that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced to the first position is defined as the first time, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced to the first position. When the variable member is in a state that is easy to pass for a second time in total,
The time when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced to the first position is defined as a third time that is not more than the first time in total, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member An easy-to-pass advantageous game that is defined such that when the variable member is displaced to the first position, the variable member is in an easy-to-pass state for a fourth time longer than the second time in total,
In the specific gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means,
A first specific game state in which the first advantageous game execution means executes only the easy-to-pass advantageous game only a predetermined number of times, and the second advantageous game execution means executes the second advantageous game a predetermined number of times;
A second specific game state in which the first advantageous game executing means executes only the difficult-to-pass advantageous games for a predetermined number of times, and the second advantageous game executing means executes the second advantageous games for a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to claim 1. A fourth passing area through which game media rolling in the gaming area can pass;
A fourth displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the fourth passage region and a second position that is difficult;
A fifth passage area through which game media rolling in the game area can pass;
A fifth displacement member displaceable to a first position that facilitates passage of the game medium to the fifth passage area and a second position that is difficult;
With
The first passage region or the second passage region is disposed between the third passage region and the fourth passage region,
The fourth passage region is
When the first passage region is disposed between the third passage region and the fourth passage region, the first passage region is disposed between the first passage region and the fifth passage region,
When the second passage region is disposed between the third passage region and the fourth passage region, the second passage region is disposed between the second passage region and the fifth passage region,
The first advantageous game execution means can control the first displacement member, the second displacement member, and the fifth displacement member to a first position a predetermined number of times as a first advantageous game,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second advantageous game execution means can control the third displacement member and the fourth displacement member to a first position a predetermined number of times as a second advantageous game. .

Images